WHISTLER BLACKCOMB MASTER PLAN UPDATE 2013

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "WHISTLER BLACKCOMB MASTER PLAN UPDATE 2013"

Transcription

1 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB MASTER PLAN UPDATE 2013

2 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB MASTER PLAN UPDATE 2013 Prepared for: Mr. Doug Forseth Senior VP Operations Intrawest Corporation 4545 Blackcomb Way Whistler, BC V0N 1B4 Tel: Fax: Prepared By: Ecosign Mountain Resort Planners Ltd Timber Lane P.O. Box 63 Whistler, B.C. Canada V0N 1B0 Tel: Fax: December 2013 Mountain Resort Planners Ltd.

3 FOREWORD Ecosign Mountain Resort Planners Ltd., has prepared ski area master plans in British Columbia since We prepared the first Ski Area Master Plan for Whistler Mountain in 1978 and we also prepared a conceptual Master Plan for Blackcomb Mountain in 1978 for the Blackcomb Skiing Corporation. Updates to the Master Plans for both mountains have been prepared periodically over the past 30 years. As the primary author of the Master Plans,it is important for the public, government officials and First Nations to understand that while we have worked diligently with the highly skilled and respected management team at Whistler Blackcomb, visions of the future are by their very nature imperfect. We have specifically found over the years that changes in the preferences of Whistler Blackcomb s clientele, population demographics and new types of winter sports mean that there will need to be flexibility in the Master Plan in the future. I give just two examples: The first two master plans for each of Whistler and Blackcomb had no mention whatsoever of snowboarding and yet snowboarders now comprise about one-third of all visitors on average throughout the winter season. The second example is new lift technology. There was no such thing as high speed, detachable grip chairlifts until our master plan for Blackcomb in Moreover, while we have long had dreams of connecting the alpine areas of Whistler and Blackcomb the technology was simply not available until around The new 3S (three ropes) technology allowed the true connection of the mountain top restaurants on each Whistler and Blackcomb with the revolutionary PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola which opened in December The tremendous success of the PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola as an iconic tourist attraction is an example of how changes in technology can allow for even greater visions to be realized. In summary, when this document is reviewed in five, ten, twenty or thirty years we request that open mindedness and flexibility be utilized in examining future proposals in the ever changing requirements of visitors to Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains. December 13, 2013 Paul E. Mathews, President Ecosign Mountain Resort Planners Ltd.

4 TABLE OF CONTENTS - WHISTLER MOUNTAIN I. INTRODUCTION.1 Location and Regional Context I 2.2 Historical Perspective I 2.3 Planning Issues I 6.4 Glossary I 7 II. INVENTORY.1 Introduction II 1.2 Physiography II 1.3 Solar Shading and Radiation Analysis II 4.4 Avalanche II 6.5 Existing Mountain Facilities II 6.6 Mountain Capacity Analysis II 22.7 Whistler Mountain Skier Carrying Capacity (SCC) Analysis II 25.8 Ski Trail Balance Statement II 27.9 Mountain Staging and Circulation II Snowmaking II Olympic Facilities II Skier Service Space Inventory and Analysis II Parking and Accommodation II Resort Staging Analysis II Other On Mountain Recreational Activities II Area Facilities Balance II 62 III. MARKET.1 Classification of Winter Sports Sites III 1.2 North American Ski Industry Overview III 2.3 Snowboarding III 7.4 Snowtubing III 8.5 Historic Winter and Summer Visitation for Whistler Blackcomb III 9.6 Skier Visit Forecast III - 14 IV. DEVELOPMENT ANALYSIS.1 Mountain Design Analysis IV 1.2 Terrain Capacity Analysis IV 1 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update i September 2013

5 .3 Future Whistler Valley Land Use IV 5 V. MOUNTAIN FACILITIES.1 Goals and Objectives V 1.2 General Concept V 5.3 Phase 15 V 8.4 Phase 16 V 12.5 Phase 17 V 15.6 Snowmaking V 33.7 On-Mountain Buildings V Controlled Recreation Boundary (CRA) V 42.9 Other On-Mountain Activities V Spearhead/Fitzsimmons Hut System V 46 VI. BASE AREA FACILITIES.1 Valley Staging Overview VI 1.2 Valley Staging Lift Requirements VI 6.3 Whistler South Base VI 8.4 Bed Unit Allocations VI 9.5 Potential Base Area Development Sites VI - 13 VII. ENVIRONMENTAL.1 Introduction VII 1.2 Overview of Current Environmental Practices VII 1.3 Sustainability Policies for Whistler Blackcomb VII 2.4 Mountain Ecosystems VII 3.5 Whistler Blackcomb Sustainability Report 2010 VII Identification of Sensitive Areas Within CRA VII 6.7 Intrawest RMOW Community Forest Memo of Understanding VII 5 Whistler Blackcomb RMOW Cheakamus Community Forest & Protected Areas Network Memorandum of Understanding VII 7.8 Whistler Interpretive Forest MOU VII 8.9 Overview of Archaeological Studies VII 8 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update ii September 2013

6 LIST OF TABLES II.1 Whistler Mountain Historical Lift Development II 8 II.2 Lift Specifications Existing Area 2013/2014 Season II 12 II.3 International Trail Standards II 13 II.4 Skier Skill Classification II 14 II.5 Ski Trail Inventory Existing Area 2013/2014 II 15 II.6 Skiing Demand by Skill Classification II 23 II.7 Planning Parameters II 25 II.8 Skier Carrying Capacity Existing Area 2013/2014 II 26 II.9 Trail Balance by Lift System Existing Area 2013/2014 II 28 II.10 Cumulative Ski Trail Balance System Existing Area 2013/2014 II 29 II.11 Existing Skier Service Space Inventory II 34 II.12 Skier Service Space Inventory Summary II 39 II.13 Ecosign Design Standards Theoretical Floorspace per Skier II 41 II.14 Existing Skier Space Use Analysis Average Top 15 Days II /07 to 2013/14 II.15 Whistler Blackcomb Combined Existing Skier Space Use II - 44 Analysis Average Top 15 Days 2006/07 to 2012/13 II.16 Existing Restaurant Seat Inventory and Analysis II 46 II.17 Whistler Valley Dwelling & Bed Unit Inventory 2013 II 47 II.18 Peak Period Occupancy Rates & skier Yields Winter 2012/13 II 50 II.19 Whistler Valley Accommodation Skier Yield II 50 Predicted Bed Unit Occupancy Peak Day 2013/14 Season II.20 Whistler Valley Day Skier Parking 2013/14 II 53 II.21 Total Whistler Valley Theoretical Maximum Staging Capacity II /14 Ski Season II.22 Whistler Blackcomb First Ride Analysis II 57 III.1 Canadian Historic Skier Visitation 2006/ /11 III 4 III.2 Annual Skier Visits BC & Alberta 1984/ /12 III 5 III.3 Whistler Blackcomb Combined Visitation III - 11 III.4 Whistler Mountain Visitation Season Ending III 12 III.5 Blackcomb Mountain Visitation Season Ending III 12 III.6 Whistler Blackcomb 20 Year Skier Visit Forecast III - 15 IV.1 Terrain Capacity Analysis Whistler Mountain IV 3 IV.2 Terrain Pod Balance Statement Whistler Mountain IV 4 IV.3 Whistler Valley Dwelling Units and Bed Units Buildout IV 6 IV.4 Peak Day Occupancy Rates and Skier Yields IV 7 IV.5 Skiers from Whistler Valley Accommodation at Buildout IV 7 Peak Day Occupancies Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update iii September 2013

7 V.1 Whistler Mountain Ski Area Development Summary V 7 V.2 Whistler Mountain Lift Specifications Buildout V 18 V.3 Whistler Mountain Ski Trail Inventory Buildout V 21 V.4 Cumulative Ski Trail Balance Statement Buildout V 30 V.5 Whistler Mountain Trail Balance by Lift System V 31 V.6 Whistler Mountain Snowmaking Summary V 33 V.7 Whistler Mountain Snowmaking Capacity Summary V - 34 V.8 Whistler Mountain Skier Service Floorspace Programming V 40 VI.1 Peak Day Skier Origins at Buildout - Whistler Blackcomb VI 1 VI.2 Skiers from Parking Buildout - Whistler Blackcomb VI 4 VI.3 Base Area Staging Capacity Buildout Whistler Blackcomb - VI 6 VI.4 Existing Valley Staging Lift Capacities - Whistler Blackcomb VI 7 VI.5 Whistler Blackcomb Future Valley Staging Lift Capacities VI 8 VI.6 Determination of Associated Percentage for Bed Unit Calculation VI - 11 VI.7 Whistler Mountain Bed Unit Allocations VI - 12 VI.8 RMOW Bed Unit Assignment to Whistler Mountain VI 13 Summary of Utilization LIST OF PLATES I.1 Critical Resort Elements I 6 II.1 Ski Pointer II 4 II.2 Skier Skill Class Distribution II 22 II.3 Skier Density Worldwide Comparison II 24 II.4 Trail Balance by Lift System - Existing Area 2013/2014 II 28 II.5 Ski Trail Balance - Existing Area 2013/2014 II 29 II.6 Whistler Mountain Space Use Balance II 43 II.7 Area Facilities Balance II 63 III.1 Total Skier Visits United States III 3 III.2 Recorded Annual Skier Visits B.C. & Alberta III 6 III.3 Snowboarders as a Percent of Total Winter Visits III 7 III.4 Percentage of Resorts with Snow Tubing III 8 III.5 Average Snow Tubing Visits Per Areaq III - 9 III.5 Whistler Blackcomb Historic Skier Visits III 10 III.7 Whistler Mountain Skier Visit Distribution Analysis III 13 III.8 Whistler Blackcomb Skier Visit Distribution Analysis III 14 III.9 Whistler Blackcomb 20 Year Skier Visit Forecast III - 16 IV.1 Terrain Pod Balance Whistler Mountain IV 4 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update iv September 2013

8 V.1 Ski Trail Balance - Buildout V 30 V.2 Whistler Mountain Lift vs. Trail Capacity V 32 LIST OF FIGURES 1. Area Location - Whistler 2. The Study Area - Whistler 3. Aspect Analysis - Whistler 4. Elevation Analysis - Whistler 5. Fall Line Analysis - Whistler 6a. Solar Analysis 09:00 hrs. - Whistler 6b. Solar Analysis 12:00 hrs. - Whistler 6c. Solar Analysis 15:00 hrs. - Whistler 7. Solar Radiation Analysis - Whistler 8a. Existing Mountain Facilities - Whistler 8b. Existing Mountain Facilities with Orthographic Photo - Whistler 9. Existing Snowmaking Coverage - Whistler 10. Olympic Facilities - Whistler 11a. Parking & Circulation Central Village - Whistler 11b. Parking & Circulation at Creekside - Whistler 12a. Existing Summer Recreation - Whistler 12b. Existing Downhill Mountain Bike Park - Whistler 12c. Existing Winter and Spring Recreation Plan - Whistler 12d. Existing Summer Recreation Plan Village Whistler 13a. Mountain Slope & Terrain Capacity Analysis - Whistler 13b. 3D Mountain Slope & Terrain Capacity Analysis View 1 Whistler 13c. Cheakamus Base Development Slope Analysis 14a. Mountain Master Plan at Buildout Whistler 14b. Dave Murray National Training Centre - Whistler 15. Snowmaking Coverage at Buildout - Whistler 16 Summer Recreation Plan at Buildout Whistler 17. Valley Staging Lifts and Parking at Buildout - Whistler 18. Whistler Cheakamus Park & Ride Whistler 19. Cheakamus & South Base Development Whistler 20. Whistler Mountain Master Plan with Potential Development Sites Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update v September 2013

9 APPENDIX A A1. Whistler Existing Tenures (Overall) A2. Whistler Lift Tenures A3. Whistler Building Tenures A4. Whistler Utilities Tenures A5. Whistler 3 rd Party Tenures Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update vi September 2013

10 I. INTRODUCTION Overview The Whistler Blackcomb Ski Resort is located on Crown Land in the Resort Municipality of Whistler. Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains are now under the ownership of Whistler Blackcomb Holdings Inc. and Nippon Cable Co. Ltd. and marketed to the public as one resort. The two mountains were originally developed as separate but adjacent ski resorts by independent owners. Each mountain has its own Operating License and Master Development Agreement with the Province of British Columbia. The Operating License governs the ongoing operation of the ski area on Crown Land. The Master Development Agreement allows for the phased development of mountain improvements and base area facilities within a Controlled Recreation Area (CRA) in accordance with a Ski Area Master Plan that is to be updated from time to time. The Blackcomb Mountain Master Plan was last updated in 1993 and an update of the Whistler Mountain Master Plan was prepared in Whistler Blackcomb retained Ecosign Mountain Resort Planners Ltd., to prepare updates of the Whistler Mountain Master Plan and the Blackcomb Mountain Master Plan in The first draft of this document was submitted to the Province in November This final report incorporates changes requested by the Province and input from other approval agencies. The report has also been updated to reflect construction that has occurred on the mountain and in the Whistler valley since A separate Ski Area Master Plan has been prepared for each mountain, however, since the two mountains share the same resort village and are interconnected by the new PEAK 2 PEAK gondola, there are many elements of these master plan reports that are common to both mountains. View towards Whistler Mountain Peak Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update I - 1 September 2013

11 The Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update 2013 contains an inventory of the existing recreation improvements, service facilities and infrastructure located within its CRA, including a description of all season recreational operations and third party tenures. The future recreational development potential of the terrain within the CRA and the RMOW s current plans for future development within Whistler are described in the Development Analysis section. The Mountain Facilities section of this report outlines Whistler Blackcomb s future plans for recreation improvements and adventure tourism activities on Whistler Mountain. Future plans for support services required at each of the mountain s valley staging areas are outlined in the Base Area Facilities section. The Environmental section of the report provides an overview of Whistler Blackcomb s environmental practices and summarizes the contents of environmental programs that are underway..1 Location and Regional Context Whistler Blackcomb Ski Resort is located in the Resort Municipality of Whistler (RMOW), in the Squamish-Lillooet Regional District. Whistler Mountain s Controlled Recreation area abuts Garibaldi Provincial Park on the south and east, private land in Whistler on the west and the Blackcomb Mountain CRA on the north. Whistler Village is approximately 120 kilometres north of Vancouver, B.C. Metro Vancouver is Canada s third largest city, with a population of approximately 2.3 million people. Vancouver International Airport is approximately 135 kilometres south of Whistler and services 17.9 million passengers annually with connections to all major Canadian & U.S cities, Europe, Asia and Australia. There is regular scheduled bus service between Whistler and Vancouver and Vancouver International Airport, with frequency of service varying by season. Access to Whistler Blackcomb is via Highway 99 (Sea to Sky Highway) which runs from West Vancouver along the edge of Howe Sound to Squamish, and inland to Whistler. Highway 99 continues for 35 kilometres north to Pemberton and then heads north-east to connect with Highway 97 in the interior of the Province. The Sea to Sky Highway between West Vancouver and Whistler was recently upgraded for the 2010 Olympic Winter Games. Interstate 5 connects Vancouver with Seattle, Washington, 220 kilometres to the south. Figure 1 illustrates the Area Location of Whistler Mountain and Whistler Resort and Figure 2 outlines the Study Area on Whistler Mountain. The Whistler Mountain CRA is 3,643 hectares (9002 acres)..2 Historical Perspective In the 1800 s, the Whistler valley was part of a traveling route to the gold fields in the Caribou region known as the Pemberton Trail. The area was first surveyed by employees of the Hudson s Bay Company in 1858 and Whistler Mountain was named Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update I - 2 September 2013

12 London Mountain by British Naval Officers and Surveyors in 1860, due to the surrounding fog. One of the first settlers in the valley was a trapper named John Millar who ran a stopping house on the Pemberton Trail near the current Function Junction. The rough trail was only suitable for those travelling by foot, leading packhorses. In 1913, Alex and Myrtle Philip purchased 10 acres of land on the northwest corner of Alta Lake and constructed Rainbow Lodge, a summer fishing resort. Access to the valley was greatly improved in 1915 with the opening of the Pacific Great Eastern (PGE) Railway providing rail service between Squamish and Lillooet. The Philips expanded Rainbow Lodge to accommodate 100 guests and it became the most popular summer tourist destination west of Banff and Jasper. Many other lodges were built around the lake to service the summer tourist trade and the small community became known as Alta Lake. In addition to water based recreation, the area between Squamish and Alta Lake was attractive for alpine hiking. Garibaldi Provincial Park, extending from just north of Squamish to just south of Pemberton was established in 1927 to conserve the significant glacial and volcanic alpine landscape. In addition to tourism, the early economy relied on logging and mining. For several years there were mills and lumber operations on the shores of the valley s lakes with the timber transported to market by rail. In 1956, the railway was extended along the shore of Howe Sound to North Vancouver. With improved access, more people built summer cabins along the shores of the valley s lakes. Although Alta Lake residents often ski toured on the surrounding mountains, lift serviced skiing wasn t contemplated until 1960 when a group of Canadian Olympic Committee officials searching for a Canadian site for a future Winter Olympics near Vancouver, selected London Mountain at Alta Lake. Franz Wilhelmsen headed a group of Vancouver businessmen and skiers in the formation of the Garibaldi Olympic Development Association (GODA) to develop the site to host a future Winter Olympics. The mountain s name was officially changed from London to its locally known name of Whistler, in honour of the shrill whistles made by the many marmots inhabiting the alpine areas. Garibaldi Lifts Limited was created in 1962, with Franz Wilhelmsen as president, to raise funds and erect and operate lifts on Whistler Mountain. By the fall of 1965, a four-passenger gondola to the mountain s mid-station, a double chairlift to the tree line and two T-bars (one in the alpine and one in the valley) had been installed, along with a parking lot and base lodge at Whistler Creek and a small warming hut in the alpine. The Provincial government completed a narrow gravel road from Vancouver, and the community of Alta Lake finally got electricity when a substation to power the ski lifts was built in Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update I - 3 September 2013

13 Whistler Mountain opened to the public in February The road from Vancouver was paved to Whistler in 1966 and to Pemberton in Following the opening of the ski area, more subdivisions and cabins were built in the surrounding area. In 1974, the Provincial government halted development to prepare a plan for the provision of local government and badly needed services such as water, sewer, fire protection and policing to the rapidly growing community. The result of the planning process was the concept of developing a destination ski resort with a pedestrian resort village anchoring two ski areas. The Resort Municipality of Whistler was created in 1975 and Alta Lake was renamed Whistler in In 1977, the province issued a proposal call for the development of a ski area on Blackcomb Mountain and in 1978, 53 acres of Crown land were given to the Municipality to develop the town centre at the base of the two mountains. Blackcomb Mountain opened in 1980 with 5 lifts and 1,240 vertical metres of skiing. Whistler Mountain installed lifts and developed trails on its north side extending to the new village site. Construction of the accommodation in Whistler Village marked the beginning of Whistler s transformation into a major destination ski resort. Independently owned, the two mountains pressured each other to improve. When Blackcomb installed the 7 th Heaven T-Bar providing skiers with one vertical mile of skiing, Whistler Mountain responded with the installation of the Peak Chair providing access to the high alpine. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update I - 4 September 2013

14 Development continued rapidly during the late 1980 s and early 1990 s, resulting in a significant increase in annual skier and summer visits. In 1987, Whistler Mountain was purchased by the Young and Barker families through Bartrack Holdings Ltd. and Marin Investments Ltd. The 10-passenger Whistler Village Gondola was installed in 1988, which provided weather protected high speed access from Whistler Village to the alpine area. The following season, the two fixed grip Green Chairs were replaced with one high speed, detachable quadruple chairlift. Whistler Resort has been rated as the number one destination resort in North America for many consecutive years in Snow Country, Ski and Skiing Magazines. In December 1996, Intrawest Corporation and Whistler Mountain Holdings announced their intention to combine the companies and their assets into one company under the Intrawest Resorts name. Over the following year, management and marketing of the two mountains was consolidated and the combined ski area became known to the public as Whistler Blackcomb. Intrawest Corporation was acquired by the private equity fund Fortress Investments LLC in October In the fall of 2010 Fortress initiated an effort to sell off their share of Whistler Blackcomb and separate it from Intrawest. The IPO was successfully completed on November 9, Whistler Blackcomb Holdings Inc. was established as a public corporation on the Toronto Stock Exchange. Nippon Cable increased their ownership to 25% and the remaining 75% is held in the public company. Under Whistler Blackcomb Holdings Inc., the two partnerhsips of Whistler Mountain Resort Limited Partnership and Blackcomb Skiing Enterprises Limited partnership operate the business of Whistler Blackcomb. Construction of the Alpine Skiing Venue for the Vancouver 2010 Olympic Winter Games was completed on the northwest side of Whistler Mountain in With the construction of the PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola in 2007 and 2008, Whistler Mountain and Blackcomb Mountain became joined via the longest continuous lift system in the world. For the 2013/14 season Whistler Mountain will operate 20 lifts including the PEAK 2 PEAK 3S Gondola, 2 high speed gondolas, 7 high speed quad chairs, 2 triple chairs, 2 alpine T-bars and 9 surface beginner lifts. There are 8 mountain restaurants for skiers, snowboarders and sightseers to enjoy. Whistler Mountain has 1 terrain park and operates a snowmaking system capable of covering 87 hectares (215 acres). Today, Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains combined have over 8,100 skiable acres with 38 lifts and more than 200 ski trails. Whistler Mountain skier/snowboarder visits for the 2012/13 season were recorded at just over 1.1 million. In 2012, the Whistler Mountain Bike Park had just under 140,000 visits and the two mountains had combined sightseeing visits of over 350,000. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update I - 5 September 2013

15 .3 Planning Issues The successful design and operation of a mountain resort requires a solid footing on three separate pillars. The three critical resort elements, as illustrated in Plate I.1, are: physical, market and economic characteristics and factors. CRITICAL RESORT ELEMENTS PLATE I.1 The physical site characteristics include: environmental resources including water, air, soil, vegetation and wildlife terrain climate natural hazards visual resources recreational resources The master planning process incorporates research by scientists, ecologists and recreational planners to document the physical characteristics of each individual site with air photos, topographical maps, three-dimensional computer models, on-site field work and surveying, and analytical planning technologies. The next critical element necessary for a feasible mountain resort deals with the market characteristics including: Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update I - 6 September 2013

16 access to the site the size and proximity of local, regional and destination markets population demographics such as: age, income and education population dynamics such as: growth, aging, and social trends, for example, fitness Finally, there are economic factors and characteristics to be considered such as: resort capacity length of operating season (winter and summer) infrastructure cost and availability capital costs of facilities operating efficiency revenue sources and pricing human resources Every resort possesses a different blend of these characteristics. It is very important to understand and document the balance between the physical, market and economic characteristics of each individual project..4 Glossary The ski industry has a number of terms and technical jargon specific to ski area development, hence, a glossary is provided: 1. Skier Visit - One person visiting a ski area for all or part of a day or night for the purpose of skiing or snowboarding. This is the total number of lift tickets issued. Skier visits include a person holding a full-day, half-day, night, complimentary, adult, child, season, or any other ticket type that gives a skier the use of an area s facilities. 2. Rated Uphill Capacity - The manufacturer s rated number of skiers per hour a lift can transport to the top of the lift. An area s hourly capacity is the sum of the individual lifts 3. VTM/Hour (000) - (Vertical Transport Metres Per Hour) - The number of people lifted 1,000 vertical metres in one hour (vertical rise of a lift, times the lift capacity per hour, divided by 1,000). An area s total VTM, is the sum of VTM for all lifts. 4. VTM Demand/Skier/Day - The amount of vertical skied (demanded) each day by a skier. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update I - 7 September 2013

17 5. Skier (Comfortable) Carrying Capacity (SCC) - The number of skiers that a given ski area can comfortably support on the slopes and lifts without overcrowding, or those that may be accommodated at one time and still preserve a congenial environment. A ski area s comfortable carrying capacity is a function of VTM demand per skier, VTM supplied per hour, difficulty of terrain and scope of support facilities. The Skier Carrying Capacity of an area is calculated assuming all the terrain is available for skiers and that the skiers are evenly distributed over the available terrain. If weather and or snow conditions make parts of the area more attractive than others, the more attractive areas may feel overcrowded even though there are fewer skiers on the mountain than the area s theoretical SCC. For ski areas like Whistler Blackcomb that sometimes need to shut down sections of the mountain due to stormy weather (high winds, poor visibility or avalanche risk), there must still be sufficient ski terrain and lift capacity to provide holiday crowds with an enjoyable ski experience. Therefore Whistler Blackcomb has historically provided an SCC in excess of the anticipated peak day skier visit levels. Skier Carrying Capacity assumes that there will be lift queues. A detachable chairlift would expect to have a lift queue equal to 2 times the ride time while the fixed grip chairlift would have a lift queue equal to its ride time under peak conditions. Sometimes it is desirable to provide sufficient lift capacity at certain lifts so that access to the lifts is relatively free flowing and no queues develop. Ecosign refers to the design capacity where no lift queues develop during the peak skier visitation as the Quality Carrying Capacity (QCC) of the lift system. 6. Utilization - Is measured, as a percent, of skier carrying capacity. Comfortable Seasonal Capacity is the product of a ski area s daily skier carrying capacity times its days of operation. Utilization compares actual skier visits to calculated comfortable seasonal capacity. 7. Terrain Pod - a contiguous area of land deemed suitable for ski lift and trail development due to its slope gradients, exposure and fall line characteristics. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update I - 8 September 2013

18 II. INVENTORY.1 Introduction The inventory stage includes the identification, analysis and mapping of all onsite and off-site factors which may affect the development potential of the ski area. The inventory data includes: the land status, climatic, biophysical, and physiographic characteristics of the Study Area, as well as an analysis of the existing ski area. The Whistler Mountain Controlled Recreation Area (CRA) comprises 3,643 hectares (9,002 acres) on the south and west side of Fitzsimmons Creek, and is illustrated on all maps and figures. Through an understanding of the site s existing conditions and natural process, environmentally sensitive areas can largely be avoided and natural development opportunities maximized. As a prelude to discussing the mountain's characteristics, it is appropriate to familiarize the reader with the basic requirements of ski area development. Ski area development is generally considered to be a non-consumptive resource use of the land. The development of ski lifts and ski trails requires the use of approximately 35 to 50 percent of the area in small, heavily developed zones. Ski lift right-of-ways are generally 12 to 15 metres in width, while ski trails vary between 30 and 60 metres wide. Subsequent to rough grading by practices selected for each site, the ski trails require fine grooming and seeding to establish a grass cover. This grass cover prevents erosion and helps to minimize hazards and damage to the skiers' equipment during low snowpack periods and possible damage to the area's snow grooming fleet. Ski lifts are generally aerial cable systems with steel towers and concrete foundations every 45 to 75 metres. Ski base area development generally includes a paved access road, parking lots, accommodation buildings, a daylodge and a maintenance centre. Additionally, appropriate power and water supply, and sewage disposal facilities are required to support any base area improvements. The physical site characteristics discussed in this section all interact to aid the planning team when assessing the capability of the natural systems to support resort development..2 Physiography The quality and feasibility of a winter sports site is highly dependent upon the topographic characteristics of each individual site. Physiographic features which substantially affect ski development in particular include: aspect (exposure), slope Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 1 September 2013

19 gradients, fall line patterns and elevations. The Study Area identified for mountain planning purposes includes the current terrain and adjacent lands encompassing approximately 5,250 hectares. Land Form The Whistler Mountain ski area is located on the end of a wide ridge situated between the Fitzsimmons Creek valley and the Cheakamus River valley. This ridge consists of several main peaks, four of which (Flute, Piccolo, Little Whistler and Whistler) are within the Study Area. The entire ridge is bounded on the south by extremely steep slopes, with the topography dropping quickly into the Cheakamus River valley. The north side of the ridge is generally bounded by fairly steep slopes on the uppermost elevations, followed by moderate slopes near the tree line and extremely steep slopes in the lower elevations, dropping quickly into the Fitzsimmons Creek valley. The peaks on the eastern side of the Study Area form several bowls, which drain to the northeast and northwest. Symphony Bowl The western end of the Study Area is split into three zones separated by a ridge protruding northward from Little Whistler and Whistler Creek. The ridge diverts the drainages northward (into Fitzsimmons Creek) and westward (into Whistler Creek). The east side of this ridge has moderate slopes draining eastward while the north side of this ridge has slopes ranging from steep to relatively flat, dropping slowly down to the Whistler Village and Brio subdivision. The slopes on the west side of the ridge slope quite steeply to the west with several moderately sloping plateaus flowing across the main fall line. The southwest corner of the Study Area, to the southwest of Whistler Creek, falls generally in the north-westerly direction from the Whistler Peak Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 2 September 2013

20 to the Whistler valley. The upper most, above tree line slopes, are extremely steep, with moderate to steep slopes in the mid elevations and moderate to flat slopes in the lower elevations. Most of this area has relatively uniform fall line patterns, except the hummock plateau in the northwest corner of the Study Area at the 900-1,000 metre elevation. Aspect Analysis Exposures within the Study Area occur mostly in the northerly directions, spanning from directly east to directly west, with small areas of exposures in the southerly directions, however, there are large amounts of south facing terrain falling towards the Cheakamus valley, which is only partly shown on the mapping. Trails serviced by the Creekside Gondola and Big Red have exposures chiefly in the western quadrant, while the rest of the ski trails generally have exposures in the northerly quadrant. Some trails in the Ratfink and Symphony Bowl area have exposures in the easterly quadrant while the Whistler Westside area (in the northwest end of the Study Area) has exposures primarily in the western quadrant. With no significant southern exposures, Whistler has very good natural snow holding qualities. Figure 3 graphically illustrates the Aspect Analysis for Whistler Mountain. Elevation The potential vertical drop available for lift serviced skiing plays an important role in site suitability since it determines the length of the trails and also the vertical transport metres (VTM) that can be supplied to the skiing public. Essentially, the more vertical the better, as many skiers use vertical rise as a basic yardstick of ski area desirability. Elevations within the Study Area range from 600 metres in the southwest corner to 2,180 metres at the peak of Whistler Mountain. This provides a potential vertical drop of 1,580 metres, while the existing ski area has a lift serviced vertical drop of 1,522 metres. Figure 4 graphically illustrates the Elevation Analysis for Whistler Mountain. Fall Line Analysis The Fall Line Analysis, as shown on Figure 5, analyzes the natural routes of descent to determine major drainages, fall line patterns, and primary and secondary fall line concentration areas. The concentration areas suggest potential lift terminals and hence, suitable base facility locations, as well as ski trail intertie points. The study area is bounded on the south by a ridge connecting Flute, Piccolo, Little Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 3 September 2013

21 Whistler and Whistler peaks. All fall lines flow in northerly directions, but mostly in a northeast direction in the western portion of the study area (collecting in Fitzsimmons Creek (which then flows northwest), in a north-westerly direction in the central and center-west parts of the study area (towards the whistler valley) and then west through south in the far south-western part of the study area..3 Solar Shading and Radiation Analysis Most skiers are highly aware of the sun's influence on snow quality. While skiers prefer to ski in the sun, they will not do so if the snow is sticky or mushy due to intense solar radiation. As illustrated in Plate II.1, skiers will follow the sun throughout the day, skiing eastern exposures in the morning, southern exposures at noon and western exposures in the afternoon. As a general rule, southern slopes are the warmest, eastern and western slopes the next warmest and northern slopes the coolest. Snowpack retention is a critical concern for any skiing operation and for this reason, slopes and trails should naturally be located where the snowpack remains for the longest period of time. Noon 9 am 3 pm East SOURCE: SKI MAGAZINE Base Lodge West North IN SPRING, STAY AHEAD OF THE SUN By John Fry Contributing Editor The trick to enjoyable spring skiing is to catch the snow as it becomes granular corn before it gets slushy. A good strategy is to keep one eye on the slopes and the other on the sun. In the morning, after a frosty night, look for east-facing and southeast-facing slopes that catch the early sun. They will be the first to soften up. As the sun climbs higher and moves into the southern sky, move with it. Ski the north-facing slopes early before they become sloppy. Finally, move to the west-facing slopes in the afternoon to search for good corn snow. Smart scrutiny of the weather and terrain will improve your day of skiing. PLATE II.1 The site s angular relationship with the sun is a critical design parameter since it determines the time of day and for how long the sun s rays will bathe parking lots, mountain restaurants, ski slopes and the village. For this reason, a detailed solar analysis has been prepared to determine areas of topographic shading at 09:00 hrs., 12:00 hrs. and 15:00 hrs. on three selected days of the season. Figures 6a through 6c Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 4 September 2013

22 illustrate the sun/shadow relationship throughout the Study Area on three selected days. Figure 6a illustrates the sun/shadow relationship at 09:00 hrs. on the three selected days. On December 21, the entire northwest half of the Study Area is shaded, in addition to the northwest sides of Flute Bowl, Harmony Bowl and Glacier Bowl. Shading also occurs in the steep slopes of Fitzsimmons Creek valley below the ski area. The only portion of the northwest side of the Study Area which is sunny at this time of the day is the western part of the Whistler Valley. By January 21, the shadows have receded only slightly. By February 21, sunlight has taken over most of the south-eastern end of the study area, but the entire west side stretching from the Peak down to Creekside is still shaded, encompassing the whole width from Olympic Station and top of Garbanzo all the way south to Bagel Bowl. As illustrated on Figure 6b, shading at 12:00 hrs. on December 21 still covers a quite significant portion of the Study Area. More than one third of the Study Area seems to be covered in shadows scattered all around the ski area. By January 21, the shadows have receded significantly but still occur in almost all the same locations as on December 22. By February 21 at 12:00 hrs., the sun has moved high enough in the sky so that the only areas sin shadows are on steep north facing slopes. As shown in Figure 6c, approximately two thirds of the Study Area is shaded at 15:00 hrs. on December 21 including all of the Fitzsimmons River valley and the entirety of the ski area except parts of West Bowl and the west facing slopes between Creekside, Mid-station and the top of the Garbanzo. The entire south facing slopes on the of Flute, Piccolo and Whistler Peak (above the Cheakamus River valley) are bathed in sunlight, as well as small parts of Flute and portions of the west facing slopes between West Bowl and Function Junction. By January 21, the shadows have receded somewhat but still cover almost as much area as on December 21; significantly, both the Creekside base and Whistler Village have come into the sunlight as has the ski trails from mid-station to Creekside. February 21 sees a significant reduction in the extent of shading, on the west side of the mountain, however much of the ski area and the entirety of the Fitzsimmons valley is still shaded. In general, snow is first deposited at higher elevations and then down in the valleys throughout the winter months. Then as the temperature starts to increase later in the season, the snowpack begins to melt as the temperature varies with elevation and changes in available solar radiation. Predicting the potential amount of solar radiation is important in the planning of a ski resort. The amount of solar radiation impacting the surface varies strongly with elevation, slope, aspect and solar shading from surrounding topographic features. Topographic shading decreases the Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 5 September 2013

23 temperature near the ground which causes the snow to last longer. Even small changes in aspect can result in substantial differences in surface warming. With this in mind, we have calculated the cumulative quantity of potential incoming solar radiation for each month during the winter ski season from December 1, 2009 to March 31, We have utilized software created and developed by Ivan Mészároš and Pavol Miklánek of the Institute of Hydrology of SAS in Bratislava, Slovakia called SOLEI 1. The time of year, sun position (azimuth and altitude), shadows cast by surrounding terrain, terrain slope, aspect and elevation are all analyzed to simulate and calculate direct, diffuse and reflected radiation. By combining these radiation values an accurate representation of potential energy coming in Kilowatt-hours per square metre over the entire study area is determined. The calculation is repeated every 15 minutes from sunrise to sunset for each day in a grid system. The resulting graphic on Figure 7 illustrates, with a warm to cool color spectrum, the warm and cool zones within the study area..4 Avalanche Due to the rugged and steep nature of the Whistler Mountain topography, there are many sites where avalanches occur naturally. From the beginning, Whistler Mountain staff needed to control some of these avalanche paths and as the ski area has expanded, avalanche control has become a very important part of the ski area operations. Control of the avalanche potential is accomplished by a wide range of methods including avalaunchers, bombs dropped from bomb trams and helicopters (during particularly extreme conditions), ski cutting and hand charges etc. The Whistler Mountain ski patrol not only performs avalanche control but is the primary avalanche forecaster at the ski area. 1. I. Mészároš, P. Miklánek (2006): Calculation of potential evapotranspiration based on solar radiation income modeling in mountainous areas. Biologia, ISSN , Vol. 61, Suppl. 19, pp. S284-S Existing Mountain Facilities Ski Lifts Significant lift, trail, maintenance and skier service facility improvements have occurred on Whistler Mountain since the area opened in February Over Whistler's 47 year history, major lifts have been installed in 14 distinctive phases of development. Historic lift development up to the 2013/2014 ski season is summarized in Table II.1 and illustrated on Figure 8a Existing Mountain Facilities. Since the 1998 Master Plan, Whistler Mountain has installed a second access route Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 6 September 2013

24 out of Whistler Village, upgraded the Peak Chair to a detachable lift, expanded and renovated the mountain top restaurant, completely redeveloped the Creekside base, provided lift service to Piccolo summit, completed the 2010 Olympic Alpine Skiing Venue and installed the PEAK 2 PEAK 3S gondola that connects the mountain top restaurants on Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains. In 2013, the Harmony Express quadruple chair was replaced with the Harmony 6, a detachable six passenger lift. The Harmony Express equipment was moved to the Crystal zone on Blackcomb Mountain (these new installations are outlined briefly below). Peak Chair Viewing Down to Roundhouse and PEAK 2 PEAK Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 7 September 2013

25 TABLE II.1 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN HISTORICAL LIFT DEVELOPMENT Phase Year Lift Lift Name Lift Hourly Year Number Type Capacity Removed :1 Gondola D4G :2 Red Chair 2C :3 T-Bar 2 (moved to Alpine 1968) TB :4 T-Bar 1 TB :5 Blue Chair 2C 1, :8 Green Chair 1 (lengthened 1970) 2C :10 Olive Chair 2C 1, :11 Orange Chair 2C 1, :12 Green Chair 2 2C 1, :13 Little Red Chair 2C 1, :14 Village Chair 3C 1, :15 Olympic Chair (shortened 1989) 3C 2, :16 Black Chair 3C 1, :20 Peak Chair 3C 1, :22 A Whistler Village Gondola (lower) D10G 2, :23 B Whistler Village Gondola (upper) D10G 2, :24 F Green Chair Express D4C 2, C Quicksilver Express Quad D4C-B 2, E Redline Express Quad D4C 2, D Harmony Express D4C 2, C Creekside Gondola (replacement) D6G 2, E Big Red Express (replacement) D4C 2, F Emerald Express (replacement) D4C 2, G Peak Express D4C 2, K Franz's Triple Chair 3C 1,405 Shorten T-bars Q Fitzsimmons Express D4C-B 1, H Garbanzo Express D4C 2, N Symphony Express D4C 2, Peak 2 Peak Gondola 3S-G 2, D(R) Harmony Express D6C 3,600 In the summer of 1998, the Peak Chair was replaced with the Peak Express, a detachable quadruple chair, installed on the same alignment. The Peak triple chair equipment was moved to the former Little Red chair location to provide return cycle skiing on the upper half of the terrain serviced by the Big Red chair. This lift allows skiers in the novice to intermediate skill class to use this zone without struggling with the steep terrain on Upper Franz s. These lift installations were accompanied by grading improvements to facilitate loading, unloading and skier circulation around the lift terminals. In 1998, Whistler Mountain completed a major addition to the Pika s/roundhouse restaurant at the top of the Village Gondola. The original roundhouse was removed and a new building connecting the top station of the Village Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 8 September 2013

26 Gondola with Pika s was completed. The new facility provides a total of 1,505 seats and has been designed so that certain sections can be segregated for different user groups. The remodelled facility is known as the Roundhouse Lodge, while the cafeteria in the lower level retains the Pika s name. A third access route up Whistler Mountain was constructed in 1999 with the installation of the Fitzsimmons and Garbanzo detachable quadruple chairs. The Fitzsimmons Express takes skiers from Whistler Village to just above the Whistler Gondola Olympic Station. The Fitzsimmons Chair (Lift Q) effectively doubled the staging capacity up Whistler Mountain from Whistler Village. The lift was installed with lexan bubbles to provide protection from the weather. From the top of the Fitzsimmons Chair skiers slide to the bottom terminal of the Garbanzo Chair (Lift H) which services the Garbanzo Basin stretching from the Olympic trail to the Tokum trail. The top terminal was located above the start of the Dave Murray Downhill near the top of the old Black chair which was removed to install this lift. Skiers using the Fitzsimmons/Garbanzo combination to stage from Whistler Village need to ski to Emerald, Redline or Franz s to access the upper mountain. The Chic Pea, a small 118-seat restaurant was constructed on the flats just beyond and below the top of the Garbanzo Chair, in Fitzsimmons Express Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 9 September 2013

27 In 2005, Whistler installed the Symphony Express (Lift N) from the bottom of Symphony Bowl to the Piccolo summit. This lift opened up access into Rhapsody and Flute Bowls. Trails serviced by this lift are in the low intermediate through expert skill class; open alpine bowls lead into naturally gladed slopes, with the bottom terminal located just below the tree line. To egress out of the Symphony Bowl area, skiers must head toward the Burnt Stew Trail back to the Harmony Express from the top of the lift, as the bottom terminal of the Symphony Lift is below the trails leading back to the rest of the mountain. Construction of the Vancouver 2010 Olympic Winter Games Alpine Skiing Venue on Whistler Mountain took place during the summers of 2006 and A new women s downhill course was constructed which included a skier underpass at the intersection of Wild Card, Franz s Run and Highway 86 to allow skiers from Upper Franz s Run and Highway 86 to pass under the Women s Downhill course as it transitions from Wild Card to Lower Franz s Run. Bottom Terminal Symphony Express The PEAK 2 PEAK 3S (3 ropes) Gondola connects the Roundhouse restaurant on Whistler Mountain with the Rendezvous restaurant on Blackcomb Mountain. The Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 10 September 2013

28 lift took 2 summer seasons to construct and opened on December 12, In the winter, skiers use this lift to move quickly (ride time of 11 minutes) between the alpine areas on the two mountains. The lift proved quite popular with ski school during the 2008/09 season when poor early season snow conditions delayed the opening of the alpine terrain on Whistler until late January. All of the high skill class children s ski and race programs running out of the Roundhouse used the PEAK 2 PEAK to access the high alpine on Blackcomb for the months of December and January. The record setting lift (longest unsupported span, highest distance above the ground) has proven quite popular as a summer sightseeing attraction with Whistler Blackcomb s summer sightseeing visits increasing to 315,000 during its first summer of operation. PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola In 2013, the Harmony Express was replaced with the Harmony 6, a detachable six passenger chair with a rated capacity of 3,600 pph. Since its installation in 1994, the Harmony Express (Lift D) has been one of the most popular lifts on the mountain and provides one of the best skier experiences available for those in the intermediate to expert skill classes. The Harmony lift is also the principle access and egress lift Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 11 September 2013

29 for Symphony Bowl. Even when the line-ups for the lift approached 30 minutes, the trails were not crowded, indicating that there was ample opportunity to increase the lift capacity without overcrowding the trails. The new lift provides a theoretical capacity increase of 50%. As of the 2013/2014 ski season, Whistler Mountain owns and operates 17 lifts consisting of a two-section detachable 10-passenger gondola, one six-passenger gondola, one six passenger detachable chairlift, six high speed quadruple chairs (one with a bubble), two triple chairlifts, two T-bars and 4 moving carpet surface lifts, as well as the PEAK 2 PEAK 3S gondola connecting with Blackcomb. In the forest where Pony Trail meets Bear Cub, Whistler has constructed a children s play structure called the Tree Fort. This facility is used by the children s ski school and is open to the general public when there is an attendant on-site. The layout of the present lift and trail system is graphically illustrated in plan view on the Existing Mountain Facilities Map (Figure 8a). A detailed inventory of the lifts, with technical specifications is shown in Table II.2. These ski lifts have a total rated up-hill capacity of 36,963 passengers per hour and produce over 14.5 million vertical transport metres per hour (VTM/hr.). The current skiable vertical drop at Whistler Mountain is 1,522 metres, stretching from the top of the Peak Chair to the bottom of the Creekside Gondola. TABLE II.2 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN LIFT SPECIFICATIONS EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 SEASON Lift Number A B C D E F G H I J K Lift Name Lower Upper Creekside Harmony Big Red Emerald The Garbanzo Olympic T-Bars Franz's Village Village Gondola Express Express Express Peak Express Chair 1&2 Chair Gondola Gondola Lift Type D10G D10G D6G D6C D4C D4C D4C D4C 3C 2/T-B 3C Year Installed Top Elevation m. 1,020 1,834 1,297 2,107 1,847 1,839 2,175 1,675 1,148 1,964 1,847 Bottom Elevation m , ,582 1,295 1,415 1,774 1,018 1,022 1,786 1,580 Total Vertical m Horizontal Distance m. 1,480 3,340 1,963 1,612 2,390 1, , ,130 Slope Distance m. 1,519 3,438 2,066 1,706 2,495 1,833 1,073 2, ,161 Average Slope % 23% 24% 33% 33% 23% 24% 40% 33% 18% 26% 24% Rated Capacity 2,640 2,640 2,370 3,600 2,800 2,800 2,500 2,800 1,800 1,515 1,405 Operating Capacity (pph) 2,640 2,640 2,097 3,600 2,800 2,535 2,500 2,800 1,656 1,515 1,272 V.T.M./Hr.(000) 906 2,149 1,350 1,890 1,546 1,075 1,003 1, Design Rope Speed m/sec Operating Speed m/sec Trip Time min Drive Output (KW) 560 1, / Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 12 September 2013

30 TABLE II.2 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN LIFT SPECIFICATIONS EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 SEASON Lift Number N Q Lift Name Symphony Fitz- Creekside CLC CLC CLC Olympic Olympic Kadenwood Express simmons Carpet Carpet Handle- Handle- Carpet I Carpet II Gondola Express tow I tow II Lift Type D4C D4C-B MC MC HT HT MC MC TOTAL Pulse G Year Installed Top Elevation m. 2,035 1, ,026 1,035 1,032 1,028 1, Bottom Elevation m. 1, ,024 1,026 1,023 1,025 1, Total Vertical m , Horizontal Distance m. 2,040 1, Slope Distance m. 2,158 1, , Average Slope % 25% 20% 19% 8% 10% 10% 10% 9% 26% 26% Rated Capacity 2,400 1,850 1,200 1, ,200 1,200 36, Operating Capacity (pph) 2,400 1,850 1,200 1, ,200 1,200 36, V.T.M./Hr.(000) 1, , Design Rope Speed m/sec max. Operating Speed m/sec Trip Time min Drive Output (KW) Hp 149kW Ski Trail Inventory In order to provide an accurate account of Whistler Mountain s ski trail system, the trails have been classified in concert with the International Ski Trail Standards (Table II.3), as well as the seven skier skill classification levels exhibited in Table II.4. TABLE II.3 INTERNATIONAL TRAIL STANDARDS TRAIL DESIGNATION Easier More Difficult Most Difficult SKIER ABILITY LEVELS Beginner & Novice Skiers Intermediate Skiers Advanced & Expert Skiers Ski trails are classified via an evaluation of the following parameters: slope width, average gradient and the steepest 30 metre vertical pitch. Since the average slope gradient of a ski trail is generally much lower than the steepest 30 metre vertical pitch, trails are usually classified to ensure that the steepest 30 metre vertical pitch falls within five percent of the acceptable terrain gradients listed in Table II.4. Furthermore, a gentle novice ski trail cannot suddenly turn into an advanced ski trail for obvious reasons. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 13 September 2013

31 TABLE II.4 SKIER SKILL CLASSIFICATIONS Acceptable Terrain Maximum Skill Classifications Gradients Gradient 1 Beginner 8-15% 20% 2 Novice 15-25% 30% 3 Low Intermediate 25-35% 40% 4 Intermediate 30-40% 45% 5 High Intermediate 35-45% 50% 6 Advanced 45-60% 65% 7 Expert 60% + The 2013/2014 trail system has been plotted at a scale of 1:5,000 with 5 metre contours on the Existing Mountain Facilities Map (Figure 8a). Figure 8b graphically illustrates the Whistler Mountain Existing Facilities with an orthographic photo. The presently developed ski trail system, as listed in Table II.5, includes 183 numbered ski trails covering 757 hectares (1,870 acres). It should be noted that there also are many treed areas not identified on this map where people ski in small numbers, both inside and outside the ski area boundary. Terrain in Chic Pea Restaurant Area Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 14 September 2013

32 TABLE II.5 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top BottomVertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift A - Lower Village Gondola Lower Olympic A1 2 1, ,070 2,097 16% 27% Mid Fantastic A % 31% Northern Lights/Lower Fant A ,010 1,028 19% 40% Upper Fantastic A4 3 1, ,060 1,075 17% 30% Crabapple partial B3 3 1, ,230 1,253 19% 35% Total Lift A 4 (not including B3) 4,539 (not including B3) , Lift B - Upper Village Gondola Upper Olympic 2/3 area B1 3 1,428 1, ,580 1,626 24% 32% Expressway B2 2 1,295 1, ,220 2,237 12% 27% Crabapple partial B3 3 1, ,230 1,253 19% 35% Upper Orange Peel 2/3 area E15 3 1,660 1, % 6% Mid Pony Trail 2/3 area E16 3 1,595 1, % 33% Bear Cub 1/3 area E17 2 1,592 1, ,540 1,557 15% 29% Upper Whiskey Jack 1/3 area F1 2 1,835 1, ,030 1,044 17% 29% Lower Whiskey Jack 1/3 area F3 3 1,661 1, ,090 1,117 22% 32% Upper Ego Bowl 1/3 area F6a 3 1,805 1, % 35% Lower Ego Bowl 1/3 area F6b 3 1,637 1, % 27% Ptarmigan Left 1/3 area H3 5 1,497 1, % 23% Ptarmigan 1/3 area H4 5 1,520 1, ,500 1,559 28% 48% Orange Peel/ Dave Murray 1/3 area H9 4 1,675 1, ,140 1,165 21% 39% Bear Paw 1/3 area H10 4 1,429 1, ,150 1,205 31% 43% Tokum 1/3 area H11 5 1,350 1, % 46% Total Lift B 3 (not including non "B" trails) 5,116 (not including non "B" trails) ,295 3,180 Lift C - Creekside Gondola Crossroads C1 4 1,270 1, % 18% Fallaway C2 6 1,225 1, % 55% Dave Murray Downhill C3 5 1, ,375 2,442 24% 46% C4 4 1, % 40% C5 4 1, % 38% C % 27% Mid & Lower Franz's partial C7 4 1, ,250 2,345 29% 40% Weasel partial E24 6 1,330 1, % 51% Peak to Creek partial G25 5 1, ,037 3,765 3,905 28% 55% Dusty's Descent partial G26 5 1,456 1, ,205 1,253 29% 44% ½ dens. Big Timber partial G27 6 1, ,940 1,996 24% 62% ½ dens. Home Run partial G28 6 1, % 45% ½ dens. Total Lift C 7 (not including non "C" trails) 6,457 (not including non "C" trails) ,295 1,370 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 15 September 2013

33 TABLE II.5 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top BottomVertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift D - Harmony Express Upper Burnt Stew D1a 3 2,105 1, ,875 1,910 17% 32% Lower Burnt Stew D1b 3 1,748 1, ,630 1,634 7% 10% Crescendo D2 6 1,930 1, % 65% D3 6 1,810 1, % 2% Sun Bowl D4 7 2,085 1, ,190 1,243 30% 71% ½ dens. D5 7 1,936 1, % 103% ½ dens. Harvey's Harrow D6 7 1,915 1, % 96% ½ dens. Robertson's D7 7 1,925 1, % 89% ½ dens. The Glades D8 4 1,825 1, % 35% Harmony Ridge D9 4 2,033 1, ,160 2,206 21% 37% D9a 4 1,780 1, % 50% Gunbarrels D10 7 1,735 1, % 65% /4 dens Lower Boomer Bowl D11 7 1,685 1, % 58% /4 dens Boomer Bowl D12 6 1,875 1, % 65% Krummholz D13 6 1,887 1, % 60% Kaleidoscope D14 7 1,910 1, % 81% Low Roll D15 7 1,935 1, % 87% Upper McConkey's D16 7 1,991 1, % 84% Harmony Horseshoes Right D17 7 2,015 1, % 96% Harmony Horseshoes Left D18 7 2,025 1, % 88% Pika's Traverse D19 3 2,105 1, ,715 1,736 16% 34% Camel Humps D20 6 2,022 1, ,485 7,486 1% 52% Harmony Piste D21 4 1,960 1, ,370 1,397 20% 47% D21a 3 1,688 1, % 23% Lower McConkey's D22 6 1,770 1, % 65% Little Whistler D23 7 2,105 1, % 80% Mumbling Rocks D24 6 1,950 1, % 47% D25 5 1,880 1, % 39% Waterfall/Bitter End D26 6 1,810 1, % 64% Lift Line D27 7 1,727 1, % 70% Lower G.S. D28 5 1,690 1, % 49% G.S. D29 3 1,837 1, ,020 1,029 13% 24% Backbowl D30 6 1,915 1, % 52% ½ dens. Rabbit Tracks D31 5 1,855 1, % 42% Chunky's Choice D32 6 1,805 1, % 54% Dapper's Delight D33 7 1,730 1, % 87% glades D34 7 1,781 1, % 71% ½ dens. Ratfink Right glades D35 7 1,777 1, % 79% ½ dens. Ratfink D36 6 1,835 1, % 58% glades D37 6 1,805 1, % 53% ½ dens. Marmot D38 3 1,730 1, ,280 1,289 12% 17% D39 6 2,033 1, % 36% D40 6 2,015 1, % 60% /4 dens Total Lift D 43 34, ,855 1,700 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 16 September 2013

34 TABLE II.5 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 Elevation 115 Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top BottomVertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift E - Big Red Express 2/3 area E1 6 1,846 1, % 48% /3 area E2 3 1,846 1, % 32% /3 area E3 3 1,846 1, ,350 1,367 16% 39% /3 area E4 4 1,830 1, % 38% Roundhouse Roll 2/3 area E5 5 1,830 1, % 30% Pale Face 2/3 area E6 7 1,787 1, % 69% Porcupine 2/3 area E7 3 1,675 1, % 31% Fisheye 2/3 area E8 3 1,713 1, % 37% Little Red Run 2/3 area E9 3 1,716 1, % 39% Upper Franz's Creek 2/3 area E10 3 1,735 1, % 33% Old Man 2/3 area E11 3 1,740 1, % 36% Franz's Meadow 2/3 area E12 6 1,710 1, % 52% Papoose 2/3 area E13 2 1,662 1, % 20% Banana Peel E14 2 1,655 1, % 27% Upper Orange Peel 2/3 area E15 3 1,660 1, % 6% Mid Pony Trail 2/3 area E16 3 1,595 1, % 33% Bear Cub 2/3 area E17 2 1,592 1, ,540 1,557 15% 29% Lower Pony Trail E18 3 1,510 1, ,145 1,165 19% 30% Upper Insanity E19 7 1,469 1, % 69% Jimmy's Joker E20 6 1,578 1, % 52% Wild Card E21 6 1,585 1, % 50% Upper Franz's E22 5 1,590 1, % 43% Goat's Gully E23 7 1,490 1, % 70% Weasel partial E24 6 1,330 1, % 51% Mid Dave Murray E25 4 1,433 1, % 45% Women's DH E26 6 1,465 1, % 32% Mid & Lower Franz's partial C7 4 1, ,250 2,345 29% 40% Doom & Gloom partial G10 6 1,924 1, % 59% ½ dens. partial G11 7 1,935 1, % 65% ½ dens. L. Whistler Bowl/Grande Fin partial G12 6 1,953 1, ,245 1,307 32% 75% Upper Whistler Bowl partial G13 6 2,171 1, % 56% West Cirque partial G14 7 2,136 1, % 105% Christmas Trees partial G15 7 1,925 1, % 67% ½ dens. Sneaky Pete partial G16 7 1,935 1, % 65% Cockalorum/West Bowl partial G17 7 1,969 1, % 81% Bagel Bowl Right partial G18 7 1,950 1, % 94% Bagel Bowl Left partial G19 5 1,905 1, % 48% partial G20 6 1,891 1, % 63% Upper Peak to Creek partial G21 5 2,164 1, ,210 2,262 22% 51% Highway 86 partial G22 5 1,683 1, ,720 1,736 14% 29% Peak to Creek partial G25 5 1, ,037 3,765 3,905 28% 55% Dusty's Descent partial G26 5 1,456 1, ,205 1,253 29% 44% ½ dens. Big Timber partial G27 6 1, ,940 1,996 24% 62% ½ dens. Home Run partial G28 6 1, % 45% ½ dens. Total Lift E 26 (not including non "E" trails) 16,775 (not including non "E" trails) ,785 1,710 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 17 September 2013

35 TABLE II.5 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top BottomVertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift F - Emerald Express Upper Whiskey Jack 1/2 area F1 2 1,838 1, ,030 1,045 17% 29% Upper Enchanted Forest F2 3 1,661 1, % 43% Lower Whiskey Jack 2/3 area F3 3 1,661 1, ,090 1,117 22% 32% Pig Alley F4 2 1,649 1, % 8% Lower Enchanted Forest F5 3 1,620 1, % 35% Upper Ego Bowl 2/3 area F6a 3 1,805 1, % 35% Lower Ego Bowl (class 3) 1/3 area F6b 3 1,637 1, % 27% Lower Ego Bowl (class 2) 1/3 area F6b 2 1,637 1, % 27% F7 4 1,594 1, % 29% Cougar Trail F8 4 1,712 1, % 41% F9 4 1,745 1, % 42% Jolly Green Giant F10 3 1,838 1, ,040 1,066 22% 32% F11 5 1,646 1, % 37% Race Center F12 4 1,520 1, % 33% Lower Jolly Green Giant F13 3 1,537 1, % 35% Chipmunk Terrain Park F14 4 1,650 1, % 29% F15 3 1,655 1, % 13% Bobcat F16 3 1,603 1, % 37% Coyote F17 4 1,560 1, % 41% Green Acres Left F18 4 1,738 1, % 41% Green Acres Right F19 5 1,740 1, % 45% F20 5 1,789 1, % 36% F21 3 1,624 1, % 32% Old Crow F22 3 1,570 1, % 35% Lower Sidewinder F23 3 1,499 1, % 11% Total Lift F 24 (not including F6b Class 2) 12,451 (not including F6b Class 2) ,140 1,990 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 18 September 2013

36 TABLE II.5 CONT. WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top BottomVertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift G - The Peak The Saddle G1 5 2,088 1, ,275 1,313 25% 53% Mathews' Traverse G2 3 2,174 2, % 15% The Couloir G3 7 2,134 2, % 121% The Cirque G4 7 2,143 2, % 169% Last Chance G5 6 2,020 1, % 48% Surprise G6 7 2,016 1, % 69% G7 7 1,985 1, % 75% Shale Slope G8 7 1,953 1, % 75% Left Hook G9 7 1,905 1, % 71% Doom & Gloom partial G10 6 1,924 1, % 59% ½ dens. partial G11 7 1,935 1, % 65% ½ dens. L. Whistler Bowl/Grande Fin partial G ,953 1, ,245 1,307 32% 75% Upper Whistler Bowl partial G13 6 2,173 1, % 56% West Cirque partial G14 7 2,136 1, % 105% Christmas Trees partial G15 7 1,925 1, % 67% ½ dens. Sneaky Pete partial G16 7 1,935 1, % 65% Cockalorum/West Bowl partial G17 7 1,969 1, % 81% Bagel Bowl Right partial G18 7 1,950 1, % 94% Bagel Bowl Left partial G19 5 1,905 1, % 48% partial G20 6 1,891 1, % 63% Upper Peak to Creek partial G21 5 2,164 1, ,210 2,262 22% 51% Highway 86 partial G22 5 1,683 1, ,720 1,736 14% 29% G23 6 2,060 1, % 45% Glacier Bowl G24 6 2,055 1, % 43% Peak to Creek partial G25 5 1, ,037 3,765 3,905 28% 55% Dusty's Descent partial G26 5 1,456 1, ,205 1,253 29% 44% ½ dens. Big Timber partial G27 6 1, ,940 1,996 24% 62% ½ dens. Home Run partial G28 6 1, % 45% ½ dens. Total Lift G 28 25, , Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 19 September 2013

37 TABLE II.5 CONT. WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top BottomVertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift H - Garbanzo Express Raven H1 5 1,674 1, % 50% Lower Raven H2 6 1,565 1, % 60% Ptarmigan Left 2/3 area H3 5 1,497 1, % 23% Ptarmigan 2/3 area H4 5 1,520 1, ,500 1,559 28% 48% Seppo's H5 6 1,674 1, ,165 1,223 32% 64% H6 5 1,195 1, % 38% H7 2 1,674 1, % 9% CNC Training Center H8 3 1,660 1, % 32% Orange Peel/ Dave Murray 2/3 area H9 4 1,674 1, ,140 1,165 21% 39% Bear Paw 2/3 area H10 4 1,429 1, ,150 1,205 31% 43% Tokum 2/3 area H11 5 1,350 1, % 46% In Deep H12 6 1,295 1, % 51% /4 dens Unsanctioned H13 6 1,350 1, % 57% /4 dens Club 21 H14 6 1,552 1, % 46% /4 dens Side Order H15 6 1,445 1, % 44% /4 dens H16 4 1,073 1, % 24% Upper Olympic 1/3 area B1 3 1,428 1, ,580 1,626 24% 32% Total Lift H 16 (not including B1) 9,905 (not including B1) ,195 2,400 Lift I - Olympic Chair I1 2 1,145 1, % 20% Upper Fantastic I2 2 1,145 1, % 20% Total Lift I 2 1, Lift J T-Bar Run J1 3 1,964 1, % 41% J2 3 1,919 1, % 32% Ridge Run J3 6 1,963 1, % 50% J4 6 1,928 1, % 58% J5 7 1,956 1, % 90% J6 6 1,970 1, % 56% Total Lift J 6 3, Lift K - Franz's Chair 1/3 area E1 6 1,846 1, % 48% /3 area E2 3 1,846 1, % 32% /3 area E3 3 1,846 1, ,350 1,367 16% 39% /3 area E4 4 1,825 1, % 38% Roundhouse Roll 1/3 area E5 5 1,825 1, % 30% Pale Face 1/3 area E6 7 1,787 1, % 69% Porcupine 1/3 area E7 3 1,675 1, % 31% Fisheye 1/3 area E8 3 1,713 1, % 37% Little Red Run 1/3 area E9 3 1,716 1, % 39% Upper Franz's Creek 1/3 area E10 3 1,735 1, % 33% Old Man 1/3 area E11 3 1,740 1, % 36% Franz's Meadow 1/3 area E12 6 1,710 1, % 52% Papoose 1/3 area E13 2 1,662 1, % 20% Upper Whiskey Jack 1/6 area F1 2 1,835 1, ,030 1,044 17% 29% Total Lift K 0 (not including partial trails) 0 (not including partial trails) Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 20 September 2013

38 TABLE II.5 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top BottomVertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift N - Symphony Express Jeff's Ode to Joy N1 3 2,030 1, ,370 2,423 21% 40% Upper Adiago N2 4 1,910 1, ,255 1,287 23% 43% Lower Adiago N3 3 1,632 1, % 29% Glissando N4 4 1,668 1, % 26% open bowl N5 6 1,898 1, % 54% /4 dens Rhapsody Bowl Left open bowl N6 7 1,934 1, % 75% /4 dens Rhapsody Bowl Right open bowl N7 5 2,020 1, ,240 1,279 25% 47% /4 dens N8 5 1,704 1, % 16% Lower Flute (traverse-to) /10 den Upper Flute (hike-to) /10 den Encore Ridge 6 1,773 1, ,070 1,097 23% 65% /4 dens Total Lift N 11 10, ,255 1,710 Lift Q - Fitzsimmons Express See Lift A Trails Total Lift Q Olympic Beginner Zone CLC Carpet 1 1,026 1, % 7% CLC Handletow I 1 1,035 1, % 9% CLC Handletow II 1 1,032 1, % 9% Olympic Carpet I 1 1,028 1, % 11% Olympic Carpet I 1 1,048 1, % 9% Walk-up zone Total Beginner Zone Creekside Beginner Zone 10 Creekside Carpet % 18% Total Beginner Zone Other Trails Upper Sidewinder 3 1,580 1, ,200 1,203 7% 8% Roundhouse-Peak Skiway 3 1,830 1, % 13% Peak Chair-Little Red Traverse 3 1,780 1, % 8% Peak Chair-Franz's Meadow Traverse 3 1,775 1, % 9% Saddle-Burnt Stew 3 2,085 2, % 21% Harmony-Saddle 5 2,105 2, % 8% Total Other Trails 6 2, Total All Lifts km Ha 17,180 17,990 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 21 September 2013

39 .6 Mountain Capacity Analysis Planning Parameters The determination of an area s Skier Carrying Capacity (SCC) is perhaps the most critical step in ski area planning. Often referred to as the comfortable carrying capacity or the skiers at one time (SAOT), this figure represents the number of skiers that can be safely supported by an area s lift and trail system while providing a quality experience to each skier ability level. The skier carrying capacity is determined via an integration of lift capacity, acceptable slope densities, slope gradients, skier skill classifications and vertical metres of lift serviced terrain. During the past several years, Ecosign has undertaken and reviewed substantial research dealing with skiing demand, skier skill distribution and skier densities. Each skier ability level places different demands upon an area s lift and trail system. Empirical observations have determined that each skier ability level will ski a relatively constant number of vertical metres per day. Skier Skill Class Distribution These reviews have also continued to support the bell curve distribution of skier skill levels, as illustrated below in Plate II.2. 35% SKIER SKILL CLASS DISTRIBUTION 30% Percent of Total Skiers 25% 20% 15% 10% 5% 0% Beginner Low Intermediate High Intermediate Novice Intermediate Advanced Expert Skill Classification PLATE II.2 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 22 September 2013

40 Vertical Transport Metres As a general rule, as the proficiency of the skier increases, the demand for vertical metres increases. Table II.6 lists the low, average and high levels of VTM demand used by Ecosign for different regions of the world. TABLE II.6 SKIING DEMAND BY SKILL CLASSIFICATION Skill Planning Skier Demand VTM/Day Classification Goals Low Average High 1 Beginner 5% Novice 10% 1,370 1,595 2,120 3 Low Intermediate 20% 1,830 2,125 2,825 4 Intermediate 30% 2,440 2,830 3,770 5 High Intermediate 20% 3,290 3,840 5,085 6 Advanced 10% 3,840 4,460 5,935 7 Expert 5% 5,485 6,370 8,475 Weighted Average 2,582 3,001 3,989 In Europe, western Canada and the western United States, we use the industry high VTM demand to ensure a quality, uncrowded skiing experience for the better conditioned, more aggressive skiers. The average level of demand is commonly found in Japan, while the low level of demand occurs where ski areas tend to be quite crowded. To ensure a high quality experience, we will use the industry high level of VTM demand for evaluating and planning Whistler Mountain. Skier Densities Based on the above mentioned review of various studies, we estimated skier densities which provide skiers with a high quality, comfortable experience, resulting in good memories and the likelihood of return visits. Densities used for planning ski areas in different parts of the world vary widely, due to the facilities the local skier has been conditioned to accept and the local land base, as illustrated in Plate II.3. In areas such as Europe, western Canada and the western United States, skier densities are relatively low compared to the densities found in ski areas in Japan or Australia, where skiers have been historically conditioned to higher densities. Densities in Japan are generally three times higher than densities in western North American destination resorts. As shown in Table II.7, acceptable skier slope densities tend to decrease as the proficiency of the skier increases. The lower density for better skiers occurs due to their increased speed, and therefore longer stopping distances, and the general increase in space needed to avoid obstacles and other skiers. As shown, the exception to this rule is that slope densities increase slightly on expert terrain since Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 23 September 2013

41 these steep, ungroomed slopes dictate controlled, short radius turns. Under these conditions, expert skiers have slower speeds and require less space for safe skiing. SKIER DENSITY WORLDWIDE COMPARISON 300 SKIERS PER HECTARE PLATE II.3 BEGINNER NOVICE LOW INTERMEDIATE INTERMEDIATE HIGH INTERMEDIATE ADVANCED SKILL CLASSIFICATION EXPERT Eastern N. America Japan Australia Europe Western N. America Listed in Table II.7 are the SAOT (Skiers At One Time) or At Area densities, which are based on the total number of skiers at the ski area, including skiers in lift queues, riding lifts, in restaurants and on the ski trails. "On-Slope" densities are significantly lower and take into account only those skiers actually on the ski trails at any given time. The densities shown will be used both in the evaluation of the existing and proposed trail capacities and the potential terrain carrying capacity of the additional slopes adjacent to the presently developed area. One important point to realize here is that even though all skiers pay the same rate, it is more costly for an operator to Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 24 September 2013

42 provide an expert with adequate lifts and terrain than for a novice or intermediate skier. The planning parameters used for Whistler Mountain are listed in Table II.7. TABLE II.7 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN PLANNING PARAMETERS Acceptable Skier Skier Densities Skill Skill Terrain Demand Skiers per Ha. Classification Mix Gradients VTM/Day At Area On Slope 1 Beginner 5% 8-15% Novice 10% 15 25% 2, Low Intermediate 20% 25 35% 2, Intermediate 30% 30 40% 3, High Intermediate 20% 35 45% 5, Advanced 10% 45 60% 5, Expert 5% 60% + 8, Ski Trails Capacity Analysis In the analysis and planning for the Whistler Mountain ski trail system, we have used the skier densities listed in Table II.7. In order to determine the skier carrying capacity of each trail, we have multiplied the density of the skill level of skiers using a particular trail, with the slope area of the trail. In addition to the general specifications of the ski trails, Table II.5 lists the Whistler trail capacities. As listed, Whistler Mountain has a total trail capacity of approximately 17,990 skiers per day at the ideal densities chosen..7 Whistler Mountain Skier Carrying Capacity (SCC) Analysis Lift Capacity Analysis Utilizing the high industry skier vertical demand, we have calculated the skier carrying capacity (SCC) of Whistler Mountain s existing lift facilities, as listed in Table II.8. Based upon this analysis, we estimate that the lift system can comfortably accommodate approximately 17,990 skiers per day. The capacity analysis assumes that the waiting time for a lift is equal to the ride time for fixed grip lifts and the wait time is double the ride time for detachable grip lifts. Additionally, the VTM demand on each lift is determined by the terrain balance of the trails serviced by that lift. It should be noted that the lower mountain lifts, the Creekside Gondola, the Lower Village Gondola and the Fitzsimmons Express chairlift, are used less frequently for return cycle skiing (except on busy days with good lower mountain snow conditions). Therefore, the SCC of these lifts is significantly impacted by the number of people needing to use these lifts for staging and the over-capacity required for morning Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 25 September 2013

43 staging and the calculated SCC s are limited by using only 35 percent of the rated capacity out of the village for return skiing. The resulting calculated SCC s then provide a reasonable balance with the return cycle skiing trails in that zone. TABLE II.8 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKIER CARRYING CAPACITY EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 Lift Lift Name Lift Hourly Vertical VTM/Hr VTM Loading Access SCC Mode 2 Mode 3 No. Type Capacity Meters (000) Demand Effic. Reduc. SCC SCC A Lower Village Gondola D10G 2, ,554 85% 65% B Upper Village Gondola D10G 2, ,149 2,969 85% 26% 3,180 3,180 3,180 C Creekside Gondola D6G 2, ,350 4,481 95% 31% 1,370 1,370 D Harmony Express D6C 3, ,890 5,759 90% 12% 1,700 1,700 E Big Red Express D4C 2, ,546 5,026 95% 15% 1,710 1,710 1,710 F Emerald Express D4C 2, ,075 3,264 95% 6% 1,990 1,990 1,990 G Peak Chair D4C 2, ,003 6,833 95% 4% H Garbanzo Express D4C 2, ,840 4,133 95% 17% 2,400 2,400 2,400 I Olympic Chair 3C 1, ,120 80% 0% J T-Bars 1&2 2/T-B 1, ,277 95% 0% K Franz's Chair 3C 1, ,181 90% 12% N Symphony Express D4C 2, ,219 4,075 95% 0% 1,710 1,710 Q Fitzsimmons Express D4C-B 1, ,554 95% 65% Creekside Carpet MC 1, CLC Carpet MC 1, CLC Handletow I HT CLC Handletow II HT Olympic Carpet I MC 1, Olympic Carpet II MC 1, Total 36,148 14,467 17,990 13,380 15,880 Note: Calculated access times for lifts A, C and Q are 3.3, 2.1 and 2.1 hours respectively During the season there are days when either the lower and/or upper mountain is closed. The closure of the zones of the mountain affects the skier carrying capacity. When the upper mountain is closed and the Harmony (1,700 skiers), Peak (810 skiers), Symphony (1,710 skiers) and T-bars 1 & 2 (390 skiers) are not operating, Whistler s skier carrying capacity is reduced to about 13,400 skiers per day. Conversely, when the lower mountain is not skiable, the return skier carrying capacity of the Lower Village Gondola (1,070) and the Creekside Gondola (960) are not available and these lifts are used as staging lifts only. The skier carrying capacity is then 15,880 skiers per day. When both the lower and upper zones of the mountain are closed, Whistler Mountain s skier carrying capacity is reduced to just 11,270 skiers per day. As discussed, it is extremely rare that weather, snow conditions, visitor demographics, etc., are harmonized in such a way that every zone of the ski area is Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 26 September 2013

44 equally attractive to guests and skier distribution is uniform over the entire ski area. For this reason, the peak business day at Whistler Blackcomb are both approximately 82-87% of the calculated SCC; and on these days, Whistler definitely is considered to be at or near capacity. Peak days at Whistler have ranged between 12,280 and 15,960 in the last 6 years; 68% to 89% of the calculated SCC. Typically, on peak days, Whistler experiences significant lift lines on the access lifts (over 30 minutes on both the Whistler Gondola and Creekside Gondola) and on the upper mountain, lift lines can exceed 30 minutes on Harmony and 15 minutes on Emerald, Red and the Peak chair..8 Ski Trail Balance Statement To accurately portray the terrain balance of the mountain complex, we computed the terrain available to each of the seven skier skill classifications and then multiplied by the skier densities exhibited in Table II.7. This exercise is often referred to as area balancing and provides management and the planning team with the data necessary to compare the mountain trail development with the apparent proportions of the skier market. The Trail Balance By Lift System (Table II.9 and Plate II.4) portrays the relationship between each lift and trail system, as well as the proportionate amount of ski terrain available to each skier skill level on each lift. In general, the lift and trail capacities at Whistler Mountain are somewhat unbalanced with lift/trail systems which range from over lifted (too much lift capacity) to under lifted. The Creekside Gondola, Emerald Express, Olympic chair and Franz s chair are fairly well balanced, while the Upper Village Gondola, Garbanzo Express and Symphony Express have more lift capacity than trail capacity. Harmony, Big Red, the Peak Chair and the T- bars have large excesses of trail capacity. Days when the Peak Chair was closed were also examined to determine lift/trail balance and are also illustrated in Plate II.4. On these days, the Big Red Chair loses its excess of trail capacity (since many runs starting on the Peak end at the Red Express) and becomes quite well balanced. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 27 September 2013

45 TABLE II.9 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN TRAIL BALANCE BY LIFT SYSTEM - EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 Lift No. A & Q B C D E F G H I J K N Lift Name Gondola & Upper Creekside Harmony Big Red Emerald The Garbanzo Olympic T-Bars Franz's Symphony Fitzsimmons Village Gondola Express Express Express Peak Express Chair 1&2 Chair Express Lift Type D10G/D4C-B D10G D6G D6C D4C D4C D4C D4C 3C 2/T-B 3C D4C Lift Capacity 1,320 3,180 1,370 1,700 1,710 1, , ,710 Skiers/Day Trail Capacity 1,015 1,295 1,295 2,855 2,785 2,140 1,685 1, ,255 Skiers/Day Trails:Lifts 77% 41% 95% 168% 163% 108% 208% 50% 75% 140% 78% 73% Average Density Skiers/Hectare Optimum Density Skiers/Hectare Demand VTM 2,554 2,969 4,481 5,759 5,026 3,264 6,833 4,133 2,120 4,277 3,181 4,075 VTM/Skier/Day Balance Beginner 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% Novice 38% 27% 0% 0% 9% 9% 0% 4% 100% 0% 27% 0% Low Intermediate 62% 51% 0% 19% 20% 53% 1% 23% 0% 58% 45% 47% Intermediate 0% 11% 49% 19% 16% 27% 0% 32% 0% 0% 16% 19% High Intermediate 0% 10% 47% 6% 17% 11% 26% 31% 0% 0% 3% 18% Advanced 0% 0% 4% 22% 17% 0% 26% 10% 0% 37% 6% 9% Expert 0% 0% 0% 34% 21% 0% 46% 0% 0% 6% 2% 7% Total 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 3,500 3,180 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN TRAIL BALANCE BY LIFT SYSTEM EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 Lift Capacity Trail Capacity Peak Chair Trail Capacity 3,000 2,855 2,785 2,500 2,400 Skiers Per Day 2,000 1,500 1,000 1,320 1,015 1,295 1,370 1,295 1,700 1,710 1,990 2, ,685 1,195 1,710 1, PLATE II.4 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 28 September 2013

46 TABLE II.10 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN CUMULATIVE SKI TRAIL BALANCE STATEMENT EXISTING AREA 2013/2014 Skill Classification Hectares Skiers Balance Ideal 1 Beginner % 5% 2 Novice , % 10% 3 Low Intermediate , % 20% 4 Intermediate , % 30% 5 High Intermediate , % 20% 6 Advanced , % 10% 7 Expert , % 5% TOTALS , % 100% Average Density = 23.3 Skiers/Hectare Optimum Density = 33.6 Skiers/Hectare Weighted Demand = 4,443 VTM/Skier/Day WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL BALANCE EXISTING AREA 2013/ % 30% 25% Percent of Total Skiers 20% 15% 10% 5% 0% Beginner Novice Low Intermediate Intermediate High Intermediate Advanced Expert PLATE II.5 Existing Ideal Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 29 September 2013

47 .9 Mountain Staging and Circulation The efficient staging of skiers is a complex operation which requires sufficient facilities both on and off the mountain to allow visitors to park, dine, buy tickets, rent equipment and other necessities, and subsequently be distributed throughout the mountain s lift and trail systems. Large mountain complexes inevitably require several staging areas to handle peak traffic flows during the morning and afternoon staging periods. Skier staging to the ski area is somewhat analogous to pipelines (lifts) pumping (skiers) up the mountain to fill reservoirs (lift and trail systems). This is particularly relevant in the case of Whistler Mountain as the bulk of the skiing is located at the mid and upper elevations, which requires lifts with large rated capacities to be installed on the lower mountain simply to handle the large numbers of skiers moving to the upper elevations (even though much of the capacity goes unused once the morning staging period has finished). Whistler Mountain has two major staging portals; the Village Portal with two main staging lifts (the Whistler Village Gondola at 2,640 pph and the Fitzsimmons Express at 1,850 pph) and Creekside with one lift the Creekside Gondola, operating at 2,097 pph. Taking into account loading inefficiencies, the upper mountain SCC of 15,300 skiers could theoretically be able to be staged up these three lifts onto the mountain in approximately 2.5 hours. It actually takes a bit longer as guests seem to prefer the Village Gondola to the Fitzsimmons Express. The Village Gondola is also the route used most often by winter sightseers. Often the line at the Village Gondola is much longer than at the Fitzsimmons Express indicating this preference..10 Snowmaking Whistler Mountain has a limited combination air/water and fan gun system for producing snow on several trails. Snowmaking has historically been used on the mid and upper mountain in the rare events of low snowpack at those high elevations in early season. Snowmaking is more heavily used on the lower elevations, where snowpack is frequently an inadequate depth to stand up to the wear and tear of the huge amount of skier traffic during afternoon egress. This system has been installed and expanded in the last 30 years, including a network installed on the west side of the mountain to ensure good snow conditions for the World Cup Downhill (top of Orange Chair to the Creekside base installed in 1996) and for the 2010 Winter Olympics (installed in ) to ensure snowpack for all the Olympic Alpine Skiing Events). Figure 9, the Existing Snowmaking Map, illustrates the snowmaking coverage at Whistler Mountain, as well as most of the pump buildings, valve stations, etc. It does not however, illustrate the actual water, air and electrical routes, hydrant locations or areas that are covered by snowmaking intermittently by stringing long hoses to areas without piping or electricity). As illustrated on Figure 9, snowmaking Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 30 September 2013

48 covers approximately 117 hectares on terrain serviced by the Village Gondola, the Emerald Express, the Garbanzo Express, Big Red (except just off the top terminal) and the Creekside Gondola. Historically, most of the snowmaking water was taken directly from Franz s Creek and either pumped directly to the snow guns or pumped into one of the two large snowmaking reservoirs located in the alpine. The upper reservoir, located above Harmony Bowl has a capacity of 45,425 m³ (12 million US gallons), while the lower reservoir, located just below the bottom of the Peak Chair has a capacity of 75,700 m³ (20 million US gallons). There is a second intake and pump station at Alder Creek, close to Olympic Station. In 2006, a third feed from Fitzsimmons Creek was installed to provide all the additional water required for snowmaking in the Alpine Skiing Venue and practice areas during the 2010 Winter Olympics. The new Fitzsimmons Creek intake is located at the Fitzsimmons Pumphouse above Base II on Blackcomb. The water extracted from Fitzsimmons Creek falls under Blackcomb s water license. A 400 mm diameter pipe was installed on Haul Back to bring the water down to the valley to feed the Whistler Mountain snowmaking system. This new intake can provide up to 22,700 m³/day (6 million US gallons per day). The amount of water used by Whistler Mountain for snowmaking varies widely from year to year depending on early season and lower mountain snow conditions; for example, in recent years, Whistler has used as much as 568,000 m³ of water (150 million US gallons) and as little as 265,000 m³ (70 million US gallons)..11 Olympic Facilities In February and March 2010, the Alpine Skiing events for the 2010 Olympic and Paralympic Winter Games were held on Whistler Mountain. VANOC and Whistler staff spent 3 years preparing the site for the Games, which included clearing a small area for new trails, regrading existing and new trails, adding snowmaking and communication lines, adding infrastructure for course safety, building a new finish/staging area (including all power, water, sewer, buildings, etc.) and installing a temporary chairlift for spectator access to the finish area. The finish area facilities were necessary to accommodate the hundreds of athletes and support staff, as well as the thousands of spectators that attended the alpine skiing events during the Games. The finish area facilities were removed after the Games, including the detachable quad chairlift connecting the finish area to the Creekside base. A small parking lot that has a capacity for approximately 125 cars has been constructed on the area used for the finish facilities. This lot is not currently in use. The ski hill improvements to create the race courses, the safety fencing and the snowmaking and communication lines remain in place as a legacy. In addition to the work carried out for the runs within the Alpine Skiing Venue, Raven and Ptarmigan Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 31 September 2013

49 received trail regrading and snowmaking upgrades to function as a practice area for the athletes. The Dave Murray National Training Centre has now been developed in this area to provide an ongoing legacy to developing athletes. In March 2012, the Canadian Alpine Skiing Championships were held using the new Dave Murray National Training Centre. The trails and snowmaking are discussed elsewhere in the inventory section of this report. The Olympic Facilities for Whistler Mountain are graphically illustrated on Figure Skier Service Space Inventory and Analysis Skier service facilities are those facilities which provide functions specifically related to the operation and management of the ski area. For planning purposes, these services can generally be broken down into three distinct categories: Staging Facilities - those services that are required as skiers arrive at the area. Commercial Facilities - those services required throughout the day as skiers are on the mountain and during après-ski hours. Operational Facilities - those services not directly required by skiers but which are essential for the day-to-day operation of the ski area. Staging facilities include ticket sales, public lockers, equipment rental and repair, ski school, and children s programs. These facilities are located in the base areas and should be sized in relation to the number of skiers staging through each base area. Equipment rental space can often be provided from leased premises within the resort village, reducing the capital investment costs for the mountain operator. Commercial facilities are located both in the base area and on the mountain and include food and bar seating, kitchen and serving areas, restrooms and accessory retail space. Restaurant space in the base area does not always need to be owned by the mountain operator, if the restaurant space in the village and accommodation buildings at the base is located close enough to the lifts to be convenient for skiers to use during the day. Restaurants on the mountain are normally the responsibility of the mountain operator. Restaurant seats should be planned relative to the number of skiers circulating in the vicinity of the proposed restaurant sites. Kitchens and restrooms must be sized in proportion to the amount of seating proposed for each restaurant. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 32 September 2013

50 Operational facilities are generally back of the house services and include administration, employee lockers and ski patrol facilities. These facilities are located both on the mountain and in the base areas. Skier Service Space Inventory An inventory of the buildings and structures providing skier service facilities for Whistler Mountain was performed in October 2009 by Whistler personnel. Ecosign has summarized this information in Table II.11. The buildings have been grouped into 4 different skier zones; Whistler Village, Creekside, Mid-Mountain and Alpine. Forty percent of the skier service space for Whistler Mountain is provided in the alpine, with the majority located in the renovated Roundhouse building at the top of the Whistler Village gondola. Thirty-one percent of the skier service floor space is provided in Whistler Village either in the gondola building or in buildings adjacent to the gondola. Roundhouse and PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola Terminal on Whistler Mountain Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 33 September 2013

51 TABLE II.11 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN EXISTING SKIER SERVICE SPACE INVENTORY Skier Zone Whistler Village Village Carleton Pan Springs Westin Ticket Sub-total Station Lodge Pacific Lane leased Kiosk Whistler G1 space Village m² m² m² m² m² m² m² Staging Facilities Ticket Sales Public Lockers Equipment Rental & Repair Guest Services / Ski School Children's Programs/Daycare Sub-total Staging ,471.4 Commercial Facilities Food & Beverage Seating Kitchen & Scramble Rest Rooms Accessory Retail ,067.8 Sub-total Commercial ,647.8 Operational Facilities Administration Employee Facilities , ,203.1 First Aid & Ski Patrol Sub Total Operational , ,612.8 Total Functional Space 1, , ,732.0 Storage Mechanical/Circulation/Walls/Waste Total Skier Service Space 1, , ,019.7 Percent of Total Space 11% 6% 3% 8% 3% 0% 31% Restaurant Seating Bike & Restaurants GLC Bean Indoor Seats Outdoor Seats Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 34 September 2013

52 TABLE II.11 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN EXISTING SKIER SERVICE SPACE INVENTORY Skier Zone Whistler Creekside Dusty's The Franz's Sub-total Legends Trail Whistler Creek m² m² m² m² Staging Facilities Ticket Sales Public Lockers Equipment Rental & Repair Guest Services / Ski School Children's Programs/Daycare Sub-total Staging ,031.2 Commercial Facilities Food & Beverage Seating Kitchen & Scramble Rest Rooms Accessory Retail Sub-total Commercial 1, ,472.3 Operational Facilities Administration Employee Facilities First Aid & Ski Patrol Sub Total Operational Total Functional Space 1, , ,332.6 Storage Mechanical/Circulation/Walls/Waste Total Skier Service Space 1, , ,165.9 Percent of Total Space 6% 4% 16% 26% Restaurant Seating Restaurants Dusty's W.Kids Indoor Seats Outdoor Seats Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 35 September 2013

53 TABLE II.11 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN EXISTING SKIER SERVICE SPACE INVENTORY Skier Zone Mid Mountain Children's Beaver Chic Raven's Sub-total Learning Tails Pea Nest Mid Centre Mountain m² m² m² m² m² Staging Facilities Ticket Sales Public Lockers Equipment Rental & Repair Guest Services / Ski School - Children's Programs/Daycare Sub-total Staging Commercial Facilities Food & Beverage Seating Kitchen & Scramble Rest Rooms Accessory Retail Sub-total Commercial Operational Facilities Administration Employee Facilities First Aid & Ski Patrol Sub Total Operational Total Functional Space ,209.5 Storage Mechanical/Circulation/Walls/Waste Total Skier Service Space ,338.1 Percent of Total Space 5% 0% 2% 1% 8% Restaurant Seating Beaver Chic Raven's Restaurants CLC Tails Pea Nest Indoor Seats Outdoor Seats Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 36 September 2013

54 TABLE II.11 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN EXISTING SKIER SERVICE SPACE INVENTORY Skier Zone Round Alpine Guest Ski CanSki Ski Peak Harmony Sub-total House Maint. Info School Demos Storage Patrol Nestle's Tea Alpine Building Kiosk Building Hut Locker Hut Hut House m² m² m² m² m² m² m² m² m² m² Staging Facilities Ticket Sales Public Lockers Equipment Rental & Repair Guest Services / Ski School Children's Programs/Daycare Sub-total Staging Commercial Facilities Food & Beverage Seating 2, ,072.4 Kitchen & Scramble Rest Rooms Accessory Retail Sub-total Commercial 3, ,383.4 Operational Facilities Administration Employee Facilities First Aid & Ski Patrol Sub Total Operational Total Functional Space 3, ,229.7 Storage Mechanical/Circulation/Walls/Waste 1, ,084.1 Total Skier Service Space 4, ,481.0 Percent of Total Space 29% 4% 0% 1% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 34% Restaurant Seating Pika's Restaurants Steeps Indoor Seats 1, ,515 Outdoor Seats Alpine Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 37 September 2013

55 Village Gondola Base Terminal including Garibaldi Lift Company restaurant Children s Learning Centre near Olympic Station (CLC) Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 38 September 2013

56 Table II.12 summarizes the total skier service space provided at Whistler Mountain. There is currently almost 16,000 m² dedicated to skier services at Whistler Mountain, not including restaurants or equipment rental shops operated by others that are in close proximity of the staging lifts in Whistler Village. Fifty five percent of the staging facilities are provided in Whistler Village with the remaining forty five percent provided in the redeveloped Creekside base. TABLE II.12 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKIER SERVICE SPACE INVENTORY SUMMARY Sub-total Sub-total Sub-total Sub-total Total Whistler Whistler Mid Alpine Whistler Village Creek Mountain Mountain m² m² m² m² m² Staging Facilities Ticket Sales Public Lockers Equipment Rental & Repair ,181.6 Guest Services / Ski School Children's Programs/Daycare Sub-total Staging 1, , ,795.2 Commercial Facilities Food & Beverage Seating , ,618.6 Kitchen & Scramble ,451.5 Rest Rooms Accessory Retail 1, ,404.9 Sub-total Commercial 1, , , ,457.3 Operational Facilities Administration ,583.2 Employee Facilities 1, ,438.8 First Aid & Ski Patrol Sub Total Operational 1, ,251.3 Total Functional Space 4, , , , ,503.8 Storage Mechanical/Circulation/Walls/Waste , ,582.2 Total Skier Service Space 5, , , , ,004.7 Percent of Total Space 31% 26% 8% 34% Restaurant Seating Restaurants Indoor Seats ,515 2,524 Outdoor Seats ,323 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 39 September 2013

57 Skier Service Space Analysis Village Gondola Rental Shop Table II.13 lists Ecosign s planning standards for the amount of skier service space recommended per skier for each of the 12 skier service functions at a day skier area and a destination resort and also shows the average of these two standards. These standards have been developed over several years and incorporate data from destination resorts in Europe, North America and Asia. The standards are used as a benchmark to evaluate the amount of existing skier services provided at a resort. It should be noted that these planning standards are average requirements and specific conditions at a resort may dictate skier service space requirements, substantially different from these guidelines. We are generally comfortable with a 50 percent variance above or below the recommended standards depending on local market conditions. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 40 September 2013

58 TABLE II.13 ECOSIGN DESIGN STANDARDS THEORETICAL FLOORSPACE PER SKIER Square Meters Ski Average Resort Skier Service Function Area Area Staging Facilities Ticket Sales Public Lockers Equipment & Repair Guest Services/Ski School Children's Programs Subtotal Staging Commercial Facilities Food Service Seating Kitchen & Scramble Restrooms Accessory/Retail Sales Subtotal Commercial Operational Facilities Administration Employee Facilities First Aid & Ski Patrol Subtotal Operational Total Functional Space % % Total Built Space The Existing Skier Service Space Use Analysis presented in Table II.14 compares the existing skier service space at Whistler Mountain with Ecosign s planning standards for destination resorts. This analysis has been carried out assuming a design day for most skier services of 12,450 skiers, which represents the average number of skier visits recorded on Whistler Mountain during the 15 busiest days over the last 6 ski seasons, excluding the 2009/10 season which was affected by the Winter Olympics. A design day somewhat less than the peak day is used since we feel that it is not necessary to build the church for Easter Sunday. With a design day set at the average of the top 15 days, we can expect about 6 to 9 days per season to exceed that level of visits. For the design condition, overall functional skier service space provided is approximately eighty eight percent of the resort standard, suggesting Whistler Mountain could comfortably service approximately 11,000 skiers. Looking at the individual categories, there appears to be a shortage of public locker, guest service, food services and ski patrol and surpluses in the areas of Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 41 September 2013

59 employee facilities and accessory retail. Plate II.6 illustrates the Whistler Mountain Space Use Balance. TABLE II.14 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN EXISTING SKIER SPACE USE ANALYSIS AVERAGE TOP 15 DAYS 2006/07 TO 2013/14 = 12,450 SKIERS/DAY Ecosign Existing Existing Percent Theoretical Resort Floor Space of Skiers Area space per Standard Served Standards Skier m²/skier m² m²/skier Staging Facilities Ticket Sales % 8,781 Public Lockers % 4,953 Equipment Rental & Repair , % 12,719 Guest Services / Ski School % 6,753 Children's Programs/Daycare % 13,462 Sub-total Staging , % 8,981 Commercial Facilities Food & Beverage Seating , % 9,047 Kitchen & Scramble , % 7,812 Rest Rooms % 10,574 Accessory Retail , % 20,163 Sub-total Commercial , % 9,965 Operational Facilities Administration , % 17,041 Employee Facilities , % 30,975 First Aid & Ski Patrol % 7,052 Sub Total Operational , % 18,917 Total Functional Space , % 10,966 Storage % 7,460 Mechanical/Circulation/Walls/Waste , % 8,565 Total Skier Service Space , % 10,397 NOTE: 1. Employee Facilities in the Springs building are used by both Whistler & Blackcomb staff. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 42 September 2013

60 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN EXISTING SPACE USE BALANCE Ticket Sales Public Lockers Equipment Rental & Repair Guest Services/Ski School Children's Programs Food & Beverage Seating Kitchen & Scramble Restrooms Design Day 12,450 skiers Accessory Retail Administration Employee Facilities First Aid & Ski Patrol 0 5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 Number of Skiers Serviced PLATE II.6 Since the merger of Whistler and Blackcomb in 1997, many of the skier service facilities are utilized by guests and employees of both mountains, such that it is difficult to precisely separate the two. A skier may stage from the base that is closest to his accommodation and then make their way to the other mountain at some point in the day. With the PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola connecting the alpine areas, this movement between the two mountains has increased significantly over the past two seasons. An analysis of the skier service space for the combined Whistler Blackcomb ski area is provided in Table II.15. This analysis was carried out using a Design Day of 22,490 skiers which is equal to the average of the top 15 days occurring over each of the past 6 seasons. The combined ski area exhibits a similar shortage in staging facilities such as public lockers and guest services/ski school space. Food and beverage facilities are adequate for about 66 to 69% of the design day while there appears to be more than enough accessory retail space. Although administration and employee space appears to be higher than the design standard, Whistler Blackcomb Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 43 September 2013

61 provides locker facilities at the mountain base areas for a high proportion of their employees, which allows the employees to use local transit to get to work. TABLE II.15 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB COMBINED EXISTING SKIER SPACE USE ANALYSIS AVERAGE TOP 15 DAYS 2006/07 TO 2012/13 = 22,640 SKIERS/DAY Ecosign Existing Existing Percent Theoretical Resort Floor Space of Skiers Area space per Standard Served Standards Skier m²/skier m² m²/skier Staging Facilities Ticket Sales % 13,359 Public Lockers % 6,176 Equipment Rental & Repair , % 19,382 Guest Services / Ski School % 11,692 Children's Programs/Daycare % 19,227 Sub-total Staging , % 13,211 Commercial Facilities Food & Beverage Seating , % 15,694 Kitchen & Scramble , % 14,883 Rest Rooms , % 17,068 Accessory Retail , % 25,218 Sub-total Commercial , % 16,550 Operational Facilities Administration , % 37,697 Employee Facilities , % 41,538 First Aid & Ski Patrol % 26,150 Sub Total Operational , % 36,551 Total Functional Space , % 18,497 Storage , % 9,613 Mechanical/Circulation/Walls/Waste , % 12,053 Total Skier Service Space , % 17,013 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 44 September 2013

62 Food Service Seating Whistler Mountain is currently serviced by a variety of on-mountain food service facilities, ranging from cafeteria style offerings at the Roundhouse, Chic Pea and Raven s Nest to table service provided at Steep s Grill, the GLC and Dusty s. In addition, skiers can come down into Whistler Village to eat at several restaurants in close proximity to the lifts. An inventory of the available seating in restaurants operated by Whistler Mountain was prepared by the Food & Beverage manager and is presented in Table II.16. Currently, Whistler Mountain has 606 indoor seats in the valley and 1,918 indoor seats on the mountain (including the 220-seat lunch facility for children in ski school programs at Olympic Station and the 90-seat lunch facility for children at Creekside). Additionally, there are 609 outdoor seats in the valley and 690 outdoor seats on the mountain that can be used on sunny days. It should be noted that independently operated facilities in the valley such as the Longhorn, Black s and Dublin Gate which are located at the snowfront have not been included and would likely double the lunchtime food service capacity in the valley. To estimate the theoretical comfortable capacity of these restaurants to provide lunch to skiers, an average turns per seat over the typical 2 hour lunch period has been assigned to each facility. These turns per seat estimates were provided by Whistler Blackcomb F&B management team based on the type of service provided at each facility. Using these estimates, we calculated that the indoor seating can accommodate 1,146 skiers in the valley (17% of total) and 5,454 skiers on the mountain (83%), while the outdoor seating can accommodate 1,725 on-mountain and 938 in the valley. As the busiest days on Whistler Blackcomb usually occur during the Christmas holidays and President s Week in mid-february, when weather conditions are not typically comfortable enough for outdoor seating, the practical total seating capacity during peak periods is limited to the indoor seats (6,600 total capacity). Since the alpine SCC accounts for about 85 percent of the mountain s carrying capacity, we would anticipate that of the 14,500 skiers on the peak day, about 12,400 skiers would be skiing on the upper mountain. The 1,918 indoor on-mountain restaurant seats can service 5,454 skiers; only about 44% of the peak business levels. Total indoor food service capacity including facilities in the valley (6,600 skiers) is about 46% of the overall peak day business (14,500). If we include the independently operated food and beverage outlets in Whistler Village that are close to the lifts, this number could perhaps be around 57% (assuming these 3 facilities have an indoor seating capacity of 1,250 people over the lunch period). Even with these facilities included, Whistler Mountain falls quite short of the industry standard which is generally in the 65-75% range (the Design Day for food services, which differs slightly from the design day for other skier services). Even with the uncounted Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 45 September 2013

63 Village seats, to meet a 70% Design Day threshold, Whistler Mountain would require an additional 950 food service seats (at 3 turns/seat), all located on-mountain. The shortage of upper mountain seating means that the on-mountain restaurants can be uncomfortably crowded on typical weekends during the peak season. Management has taken steps to alleviate the shortage by encouraging skiers to eat lunch outside the peak period of 11:30 a.m. to 1:30 p.m. and scheduling early lunches for ski school programs operating out of the Roundhouse. TABLE II.16 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN EXISTING RESTAURANT SEAT INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS Existing Counted Seats Turns per Seat Theoretical Capacity (Skiers) Peak Periods Peak Periods WHISTLER Inside Outside Total Inside Outside Inside Outside Total Valley Seats Dusty's Bar Dusty's Cafe Whistler Kids Creekside Garbanzo Bike & Bean GLC Valley Total , , ,083 On-Mountain Seats Roundhouse Lodge 1, , ,146 1,125 5,271 Steep's Raven's Nest Chic Pea Harmony Tea House n.a. n.a. Children's Learning Centre On-Mountain Total 1, , ,454 1,725 7,179 TOTAL WHISTLER 2,524 1,299 4, ,600 2,663 9,262 BOTH MOUNTAINS 5,016 2,241 7, ,453 4,719 18, Parking and Accommodation Base Area Accommodation Inventory The Resort Municipality of Whistler (RMOW) measures its accommodation capacity in bed units, with one bed unit representing accommodation for one person. The developed bed unit inventory was updated in 2010 as part of the work done for the new Official Community Plan, adopted in At the end of 2010, the developed bed unit inventory was estimated at 53,098 of an approved capacity of 61,273. The OCP proposes a bed unit limit of 61,750 for lands within the RMOW. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 46 September 2013

64 Ecosign has prepared the following estimate of the current (2013) Dwelling and Bed Unit Inventory from information available from a range of sources. Most of the remaining undeveloped hotel units are located on the Holburn Tennis Centre site and are in the process of being rezoned for tourist accommodation in the form of townhouses.. Table II.17 summarizes the 2013 Dwelling and Bed Unit Inventory. The Cheakamus Crossing, Baxter Creek and Rainbow neighbourhoods have undeveloped sites for market tourist accommodation in the form of townhouses and apartments. There are also several approved development sites for single family homes in the Rainbow, Baxter Creek, Kadenwood, Stonebridge, Lakecrest and Cypress Place developments as well a few lots scattered throughout the more mature neighbourhoods. There are undeveloped resident housing sites in Spring Creek, the Blackcomb Benchlands, Cheakamus Crossing and Alta Lake Road. TABLE II.17 WHISTLER VALLEY DWELLING & BED UNIT INVENTORY 2013 Developed Undeveloped Totals Units Bed Units Units Bed Units Units Bed Units Single Family 2,633 15, ,820 3,103 18,618 Duplex 461 2, ,862 Multi-Family 3,827 14, ,167 4,161 15,222 Tourist Accommodation 2,819 6, ,098 3,117 9,044 Pension Hotel 3,345 6, ,037 3,745 7,970 Employee/Resident Restricted 1,796 6, ,020 6,744 RV/Campsites Hostel TOTAL 15,508 53,231 1,777 8,042 17,285 61,273 Skiers from Beds By making assumptions of bed unit occupancy and skier participation rates, we can estimate the number of skiers generated by the accommodation during peak periods. Ecosign s experience at other resorts has provided the following observations which have been used to guide our estimates: Even though a hotel room or chalet is rented, not every bed in it may be occupied. For example a house capable of sleeping ten may be rented by a group of seven, or one couple may occupy a hotel room with four pillows. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 47 September 2013

65 Not all of the guests staying at the resort may elect to ski or snowboard on any given day. Some of the guests may be non-skiers along with the family, some may be pursuing another of the many alternative winter activities around the resort and some may not ski because it is the day they are leaving the resort. Accommodation at Creekside Tourism Whistler tracks the occupancy of commercial units offered for nightly rental through its central reservation system. This tracking system includes hotels, condotels, townhouses, chalets and pension style accommodation that are actively rented. Winter (November 1 to April 30) room nights sold and winter season occupancy rates peaked in the 2000/2001 ski season and have remained relatively flat since then, fluctuating with the snow conditions. The opening of the Four Seasons, Four Seasons Residences, Pan Pacific Two, the condotel projects at Creekside and the Nita Lake Lodge have increased the supply of commercial units, resulting in slightly lower winter season occupancy rates. These have improved over the last few seasons, however, still have not reached the historic highs. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 48 September 2013

66 During the period between Christmas and New Year and President s Week (mid February), peak daily unit occupancy rates have been up to 96 percent for the 8,000 rooms/units in Tourism Whistler s commercial accommodation inventory. This information was used as a guide in establishing the bed unit occupancy and skier participation rates for the various property categories, as outlined in Table II.18. With the exception of hotels and pensions, the other unit types can all be either a home for a permanent or seasonal resident, a second home or a vacation rental property. The assumed bed unit occupancy rates must reflect the blend of user categories during peak periods such as Christmas, Presidents Week and March Break. Looking up at Whistler Mountain Ski Out from Village Base Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 49 September 2013

67 TABLE II.18 PEAK PERIOD OCCUPANCY RATES AND SKIER YIELDS WINTER 2012/13 Hotel TA Multi Single Resident Hostel Camp- Family Family Restricted Pension ground Duplex Bed Unit Occupancy Rate 90% 75% 70% 50% 90% Skier Participation Rate 80% 80% 60% 50% 25% Skier Yield 72% 60% 42% 25% 23% Using the skier yields listed above, the number of skiers that could be generated from accommodation within the Whistler Valley on a peak day is 21,520 skiers, as shown in Table II.19. Skiers from accommodation in the entire Whistler Valley have been grouped by location within the valley. For instance, the south of Creekside grouping includes Cheakamus Crossing, Spring Creek, Function Junction, Bayshores, Millar s Pond, Twin Lakes and the southern properties accessed from Alta Lake Road, whereas north of Village includes Montebello, White Gold, Tapleys, Whistler Cay Heights, Barnfield, Nesters, Nicklaus North, Alpine, Emerald and the northern properties along Alta Lake Road. TABLE II.19 WHISTLER VALLEY ACCOMMODATION SKIER YIELD PREDICTED BY BED UNIT OCCUPANCY - PEAK DAY /14 SKI SEASON 2013 Developed Beds Hotel TA Multi Single Resident Hostel Camp- Family Family Restricted Skiers Pension ground Duplex South of Creekside ,474 2,130 2,020 1,660 Creekside - 1, , ,860 Between Creekside & Village 142 1,062 3,431 3, ,250 Whistler Village 3, ,300 Upper Village 1,674 2,652 3, ,430 Village North 1, , ,290 North of Village North ,752 10,848 2,424 4,730 Totals 7,358 7,174 14,055 18,564 6,080 21,520 In addition to the skiers coming from accommodation within the resort, there are also day skiers who come from elsewhere in the region to ski for the day and destination visitors who ski on the day they arrive in Whistler. The number of day skiers arriving from outside of Whistler is difficult to estimate. In 1997, Ecosign Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 50 September 2013

68 conducted a lift base survey as part of the RMOW Comprehensive Transportation Strategy (Whistler CTS) project. On a Saturday in mid-february (not the peak day), skiers entering the staging lift queues were asked whether they were day skiers, residents, overnight visitors or second home owners. Nineteen percent of those asked identified themselves as day skiers. The RMOW repeated this survey on 8 weekend days in 2002 and seventeen percent identified themselves as day skiers. This type of survey has not been carried out since then. The highway improvements completed for the 2010 Olympics have made it easier and safer for day skiers from the Lower Mainland to come to Whistler so it is possible that day skier numbers could be higher with the right conditions (fresh snow and sunshine). If we assume the combination of day skiers and destination skiers skiing on the day they arrive at the resort range from 20 to 30 percent of all skiers, the peak day visitation levels could be in the 27,250 to 31,450 level. Historically, a peak day of 27,372 skiers occurred during the 2001/2002 season and there have only been a handful of days with over 27,000 skiers since then. Parking Day skier parking in Whistler is currently provided in three general locations. 1. The Village Day Lots (P1 through P5) are located in the Fitzsimmons Creek floodplain between Blackcomb Way and the creek, as shown on Figure 11a. Lots 1, 2 and a portion of Lot 3 are within a comfortable walking distance of the Whistler Mountain Village staging lifts and the Blackcomb Excalibur and Wizard staging lifts. Lots 4 and 5 are beyond a comfortable skier walking distance to the lifts, however Whistler Blackcomb operate a free shuttle from these lots to the Village transit loop and the Blackcomb Wizard base. Historically these lots were owned by the Province and used by Whistler Blackcomb for the purpose of providing parking to support the ski operations. In 2008, the RMOW took over ownership of the Village lots from the Province with a commitment that the first use of the lots would remain as skier parking followed by parking for the community as a whole. Since Whistler Blackcomb has an obligation to the Province to continue to provide day skier parking, operation of the Village day lots is managed by the ski area and parking revenues are collected by the RMOW. 2. At Creekside, a three and a half level underground parking structure provides 1,268 stalls for skier parking, as shown on Figure 11b. The surface level, as well as a portion of the first underground level contains an additional 164 stalls for short duration commercial parking. The surface level is also used for ski school drop-off, over height vehicles, commercial Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 51 September 2013

69 loading, charter bus parking and a taxi stand. The Creekside parkade is owned and operated by Whistler Blackcomb. With the PEAK 2 PEAK gondola connecting the two mountains, skiers from the south can park at Creekside and ski Blackcomb. 3. On Blackcomb, the ski area has a commitment with the Province and the RMOW to provide 1,500 skier parking stalls. These stalls are currently located on Crown land within Blackcomb Mountain s Controlled Recreational Area at Base II in Lots (P6 through P8), as well as approximately 190 stalls along the road that are used on peak days. Skiers who park at Base II can either stage up Blackcomb on the second stage of the Excalibur lift or ski down to the Village to access Whistler Mountain. The existing skier parking lot inventory for the 2013/14 season is listed in Table II.20. At Base II and in Lot 5, the number of stalls shown reflects the use of parking lot attendants to achieve maximum parking densities. In the summer of 2009, the RMOW paved Lots 1 through 4 and instituted pay parking on Village Lots 1 through 3 in June The number of stalls shown for these lots reflects the stalls delineated on the pavement. Since the drive aisles are generous, on peak days, the parking attendants can achieve higher capacities by reducing the circulation space. The village lots are also used by village employees and shoppers. We have estimated the percent of cars that are skier cars for each of the lots based on previous studies. There have been no recent parking lot entrance or exit surveys. As shown in Table II.19, the existing day skier parking lots can supply approximately 11,000 skiers. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 52 September 2013

70 TABLE II.20 WHISTLER VALLEY DAY SKIER PARKING 2013/2014 Number Average Percent Skiers Area Of People Skier from (ha.) Stalls per Car Cars Parking Creekside n.a. 1, % 3,107 Village Day Skier Lots Lot 1 - Paved % 426 Lot 2 - Paved % 514 Lot 3 - Paved % 890 Lot 4 - Paved % 1,670 Lot 5 - Gravel % 788 Sub-total Village ,949 4,288 Blackcomb Base II Lot 6 - Gravel % 1,160 Lot 7 - Gravel % 1,019 Lot 8 - Gravel % 956 Miscellaneous Roadside % 483 Sub-total Blackcomb ,500 3,618 Total Skier Parking ,717 11, Resort Staging Analysis An analysis of the existing maximum potential base area skier staging capacity has been undertaken for the Central Village Zone and for the Creekside Zone. Figure 11 illustrates the two areas at current development levels with existing staging lifts and skier walking distance zones. The potential to accommodate overnight guests within skier walking distance or in ski-in/ski-out developments has been calculated for both base staging areas, using information from the 2013 Accommodation Land Use Inventory and the occupancy rate assumptions discussed in Section II.13. Skier walking distance to valley base staging lifts is one of the most critical design parameters for successful mountain resorts. By locating all services and recreational opportunities within a comfortable walking distance of the accommodation for a majority of resort guests, the requirement for vehicular transportation within the resort is minimized. Similarly parking for recreational users from outside the resort must also be within walking distance to minimize the need for transit. Ecosign has defined Skier Walking Distance as the distance someone wearing ski boots and carrying ski equipment can comfortably walk in 10 minutes. Assuming a walking speed of 2.7 km/hr., translates into a distance of 450 metres over Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 53 September 2013

71 level ground. The 450 metre distance is adjusted to account for grade changes by reducing the horizontal walking distance 4 metres for every one metre in vertical rise. The base area staging analysis calculates the number of skiers the base area can supply to the mountain. For this process, skiers are divided into two groups: Day Skiers, who are skiers that originate from outside the area and are coming to ski for one day only, and Overnight Skiers, who are skiers generated from accommodation within the resort. Overnight Skiers are further divided into those staying in skiin/ski-out accommodation close to the lift bases and those who must drive or take public transportation to get to the ski lifts. If overnight skiers use their car to get to the lifts, there will then be less parking available for day skiers from outside the Whistler Valley. The base area capacity is the sum of the number of skiers that can arrive at the lifts, coming from accommodation within walking distance of the lifts, plus the number of skiers coming from parking within walking distance of the lifts and from public transportation, shuttle or private vehicle drop-off. Central Village In the Central Village Zone (Whistler Village, Village North and Upper Village), there are three skier walking distance zones, as illustrated on Figure 11, centered around the following staging lifts. The Whistler Village Base, with the Whistler Village Gondola and Fitzsimmons Express Quad to Whistler Mountain and the Excalibur Gondola to Blackcomb Mountain and Base 2. The Blackcomb Mountain Wizard Base, with the Wizard Express bubble quad chair and the Magic Chair. The Excalibur Gondola Mid Station at Base II on the Blackcomb Benchlands. All of the properties within Whistler Village and most of the properties within Village North are within walking distance of the Whistler Village lifts to Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains. On the Blackcomb Benchlands (Upper Village), several of the properties are either within walking distance of the Wizard Base or are skiin/ski-out. A free village shuttle operated by the RMOW serves to provide those skiers from Village North and the Upper Village that are beyond walking distance easy access to the lifts by dropping them off at either the Whistler Village transit loop or the Wizard base. On peak days, approximately 9,350 skiers are generated from accommodation within SWD in the Central Village Zone. Although, approximately one-half of day skier Lot 3 and all of Lots 4 and 5 are beyond skier walking distance Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 54 September 2013

72 of the Central Village lift terminals, on busy days, skiers do park here and walk to the lifts or wait for the Whistler Blackcomb shuttle. Data collected during the Whistler CTS in 1997 showed that about 20 percent of the skiers staging from the Central Village Zone arrive at the lifts via transit, taxi or private vehicle drop-off. Since both transit use and private vehicle drop-off have increased since then, we expect the actual percent would be higher, however, there have been no studies conducted to confirm this. Creekside Creekside has been entirely redeveloped in the last ten years, providing a substantial amount of new commercial accommodation right at the lift base in The Legends, First Tracks Lodge and Evolution. The original day skier parking lot was replaced with structured parking as part of this redevelopment. In addition to the properties at the lift base, Gondola Village, a portion of the south end of Nordic Estates and the Beaver Flats employee housing are all within skier walking distance or are ski-in/ski-out. The percentage of skiers arriving by transportation other than private car or walking, is assumed to be 10 percent, as per the results of the Whistler CTS survey. Again, we suspect that the actual proportion of skiers being dropped off could be much higher. Base Area Staging Capacity The theoretical base area staging capacity for the entire Whistler Valley using the assumptions for occupancy, skier participation and vehicle occupancy rates discussed previously, is approximately 27,100 skiers, as shown in Table II.21. The peak day experienced at Whistler Blackcomb over the past ten years was approximately 27,400 skiers. The average times to stage the this number of skiers with the existing lifts is also shown, assuming the skiers at each location spread themselves evenly among the available lifts. Over recent years since the installation of the Fitzsimmons Express, Whistler Mountain has typically captured approximately 55 percent of the skier volume on busy days. Using this assumption, the theoretical capacity of the base area to supply skiers to Blackcomb Mountain in 2013/14 assuming all beds and parking lots are filled to capacity would be 14,900 skiers. In fact, the busiest day experienced on Whistler Mountain in the past ten years was 15,859 skiers on December 29, The total number of skiers on both mountains that day was 26,324 slightly under the theoretical base staging capacity. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 55 September 2013

73 TABLE II.21 TOTAL WHISTLER VALLEY THEORETICAL MAXIMUM BASE AREA STAGING CAPACITY 2013/14 SKI SEASON Skiers from Skiers Effective Accomm. from Lift in Skier Skiers Other Total Staging Staging Walking From Trans- Staging Capacity Time Distance Parking portation Skiers Skiers/Hour Hour Creekside 1,860 3, ,519 1, Central Village Zone 9,348 7,906 4,314 21,568 8, Total 11,208 11,013 4,865 27,086 10, Whistler Blackcomb provided Ecosign with daily records showing the first scans at each staging lift for the past six seasons, excluding the Olympic year. This data included staff and sightseers uploading, as well as skiers. An analysis of the busiest 20 days of each season is illustrated in Table II.22. This analysis shows that the distribution of skiers between the six valley staging lift access points has been very stable over the past six years with 55 to 56 percent of the total skiers on Whistler Typically, 19 to 23 percent of the skiers on both mountains stage out of Creekside, the Wizard base, 23 to 27 percent stage up the Whistler Village Gondola and use of the Fitzsimmons is about 9 to 12% of all uploads. Clearly on the busiest days, the Creekside and Village Gondolas are plugged with uploading skiers, leaving no capacity for return cycle skiing on the trails serviced by these lifts until after the morning upload period is over. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 56 September 2013

74 TABLE II.22 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB FIRST RIDE ANALYSIS 2006/07 TO 2008/09 SKI SEASONS Staging Capacity (pph) WHISTLER MOUNTAIN BLACKCOMB MOUNTAIN Village Gondola Fitzsimmons Expres s Creekside Gondola Sub-total Whistler Wizard Express Excalibur Village Excalibur Base II Sub-total Blackcomb Total W-B 2,244 1,758 1,992 5,994 2,518 2,340 2,340 4,858 Skier Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total * 2006/07 Peak Day 7,405 26% 3,211 11% 5,474 19% 16,090 56% 6,113 21% 3,825 13% 2,521 9% 12,459 44% 28,549 Staging Time (hours) Average Top 10 7,016 27% 2,576 10% 4,936 19% 14,527 56% % % 1,587 6% 11,468 44% 25,996 Average Top 15 6,704 27% 2,467 10% 4,725 19% 13,896 55% % % % 11,301 45% 25,197 Average Top 20 6,578 27% 2,387 10% 4,587 19% 13,552 55% 5,307 22% % 1,419 6% 10,950 45% 24, /08 Peak Day 7,935 28% 3,292 12% 5,551 19% 16,778 59% 6,225 22% 4,009 14% 1,594 6% 11,828 41% 28,606 Staging Time (hours) Average Top 10 7,004 27% 2,469 10% 5,140 20% 14,614 56% 5,434 21% 4,391 17% 1,426 6% 11,252 44% 25,865 Average Top 15 6,770 27% 2,369 10% 4,852 19% 13,990 56% 5,314 21% 4,206 17% 1,389 6% 10,909 44% 24,899 Average Top 20 6,636 27% 2,228 9% 4,700 19% 13,565 56% 5,206 21% 4,141 17% 1,348 6% 10,696 44% 24, /09 Peak Day 4,594 18% 3,812 15% 5,017 20% 13,423 53% 6,214 25% 4,350 17% 1,331 5% 11,895 47% 25,318 Staging Time (hours) Average Top 10 6,002 25% 2,308 10% 5,050 21% 13,360 56% 5,442 23% 3,555 15% 1,512 6% 10,509 44% 23,870 Average Top 15 5,784 25% 2,217 10% 4,763 21% 12,764 56% 5,217 23% 3,431 15% 1,376 6% 10,024 44% 22,788 Average Top 20 5,674 26% 2,058 9% 4,681 21% 12,413 56% 4,996 23% 3,328 15% 1,304 6% 9,628 44% 22,041 * Total Scans includes staff and sightseeing visits Note in 2008/09 the alpine terrain on Whistler Mountain did not open until the end of January Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 57 September 2013

75 TABLE II.22 CONT D WHISTLER BLACKCOMB FIRST RIDE ANALYSIS 2010/11 TO 2012/13 SKI SEASONS WHISTLER MOUNTAIN BLACKCOMB MOUNTAIN Village Fitzsimmons Creekside Sub-total Wizard Excalibur Excalibur Sub-total Total Gondola Expres s Gondola Whistler Express Village Base II Blackcomb W-B Staging Capacity (pph) 2,244 1,758 1,992 5,994 2,518 2,340 2,340 4,858 Skier Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans % of Scans Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total * 2010/11 Peak Day 6,209 23% 4,697 17% 5,893 22% 16,799 62% 5,500 20% 2,391 9% 2,497 9% 10,388 38% 27,187 Staging Time (hours) Average Top 10 5,264 22% 2,469 10% 5,264 22% 12,996 55% 5,297 22% 3,702 16% 1,813 8% 10,812 45% 23,807 Average Top 15 5,145 23% 2,024 9% 5,145 23% 12,315 55% 5,016 22% 3,582 16% 1,620 7% 10,218 45% 22,534 Average Top 20 5,030 23% 1,819 8% 5,030 23% 11,879 55% 4,793 22% 3,471 16% 1,644 8% 9,907 45% 21, /12 Peak Day 5,841 21% 3,397 12% 6,111 22% 15,349 56% 5,718 21% 4,281 16% 1,925 7% 11,924 44% 27,273 Staging Time (hours) Average Top 10 5,945 24% 2,312 9% 5,504 22% 13,761 56% 5,388 22% 3,873 16% 1,744 7% 11,005 44% 24,765 Average Top 15 5,810 24% 2,178 9% 5,328 22% 13,316 56% 5,194 22% 3,541 15% 1,684 7% 10,419 44% 23,735 Average Top 20 5,641 25% 1,964 9% 5,232 23% 12,837 56% 4,992 22% 3,355 15% 1,662 7% 10,009 44% 22, /13 Peak Day 6,063 22% 3,220 12% 6,121 23% 15,404 57% 6,140 23% 3,954 15% 1,590 6% 11,684 43% 27,088 Staging Time (hours) Average Top 10 5,705 23% 2,425 10% 5,467 22% 13,597 56% 5,554 23% 3,607 15% 1,586 7% 10,747 44% 24,345 Average Top 15 5,600 24% 2,211 9% 5,221 22% 13,032 56% 5,280 23% 3,505 15% 1,509 6% 10,294 44% 23,327 Average Top 20 5,392 24% 2,165 10% 5,033 22% 12,590 56% 5,102 23% 3,390 15% 1,516 7% 10,008 44% 22,598 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 58 September 2013

76 .15 Other On Mountain Recreational Activities In addition to downhill skiing, Whistler Blackcomb and other independent operators provide a range of other recreational activities within Whistler Mountain s Controlled Recreational Area. Some of these activities are available year round and some are offered on a seasonal basis. Some of these activities have required the construction of permanent facilities such as trails, terrain features, sheds and huts, while many of the activities take place using the existing facilities constructed for the ski area operation. This section of the report provides a brief description of the additional recreational activities currently offered on Whistler Mountain. Figures 12a, 12b and 12c illustrate facilities that have been constructed to support these recreational offerings. Sightseeing Sightseers can access Whistler Mountain via the Whistler Village Gondola whenever the lift is running, which is most of the year. During the winter ski season, sightseers have access to the Roundhouse restaurant and observation deck and can take the PEAK 2 PEAK gondola over to Blackcomb to visit the Rendezvous restaurant. In the summer, sightseers have access to a walking and hiking trail system on both mountains. Winter season sightseeing visits on Whistler Mountain have ranged from 37,750 to 66,670 over the past ten years, while summer season sightseeing has ranged from 127,000 to 270,000 during the same time period. The installation of the PEAK 2 PEAK coincided with a significant increase in summer sightseeing visits during Recent sightseeing visitor statistics are provided in the Market section of the report. Hiking Whistler Mountain has developed an alpine trail network for hiking that extends out from the Roundhouse and from the top of the Peak chair. The hiking trails are illustrated in red on Figure 12a. The Musical Bumps Trail along the ridge connecting the Piccolo, Flute and Oboe summits joins up with the Singing Pass Trail in Garibaldi Provincial Park. The trail pathways are clearly marked and interpretative signage is provided to enhance the experience. Guests are advised to stay on the trails to protect the sensitive alpine environment. Virtually all hikers use the lifts to get to the mountain top. Cross Country Mountain Bike Trails Several cross country mountain bike trails pass through the lower elevations of Whistler Mountain s CRA. These are illustrated on Figure 12a. These trails are used freely by the general public. Some of the trails are maintained by the local mountain bike club, Whistler Off- Road Cycling Association (WORCA). Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 59 September 2013

77 Downhill Mountain Biking Whistler Blackcomb operates a downhill mountain bike park on Whistler Mountain that is typically open from early May through to Thanksgiving weekend. The mountain bike park is serviced by the Whistler Village Gondola as well as the Fitzsimmons Express and the Garbanzo Express chairlifts. The Top of the World trail accessed by the Peak Express opened in The Whistler Mountain Bike Park contains over 50 named trails for all skill classes ranging from easy (green circle) to expert (double black diamond). The mountain biking trails are shown in Figure 12a and the mountain bike park is shown in more detail in Figure 12b. In addition to trails, the mountain bike park contains many natural and man made features such as bridges, jumps and table tops. Many of the features are constructed on the lower slopes of the mountain each spring at the end of the ski season and removed prior to the first snowfall in the fall. Visits to the mountain bike park have more than doubled from 68,630 in 2003 to 139,900 in New trails have been added each summer to keep pace with the growing demand. The existing trail inventory contains 62.5 kilometres of trails. Whistler Mountain Bike Park Mountain Ecology Bear and Wildlife Viewing Tours During the summer season, wildlife viewing tours are offered on Whistler and Blackcomb mountains. These tours are guided by local black bear researcher Michael Allen. Guests are transported around the mountain to bear viewing areas in four wheel drive vehicles traveling on the mountain access roads. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 60 September 2013

78 Guided Mountaineering and Hiking The Whistler Alpine Guides Bureau and Coast Mountain Guides offer summer alpine activities on Whistler Mountain including rock climbing tours, via ferrata, wilderness hikes, glacier walks, rock scrambling, mountaineering courses, etc. The Whistler Alpine Guides Bureau offers guided winter backcountry skiing tours leaving from the top of Whistler Mountain that take guests into the backcountry beyond the CRA. The Whistler Alpine Guides Bureau has had 725, 981 and 879 guests taking part in these activities in 2009, 2008, and 2007 respectively (on both Whistler and Blackcomb combined). Coast Mountain Guides has had 224, 362 and 527 guests taking part in these activities in the last 3 years. Ziptrek Ecotours Ziptrek Ecotours operates several zip lines and a tree trek tour along the south side of Fitzsimmons Creek. Their facilities overlap the boundary between Whistler and Blackcomb Mountain s CRA, with facilities on both sides of the boundary, as shown in Figure 12a. Their facilities consist of bridges and platforms in the tree canopy up to 50 metres above the ground with 10 zip lines extending between some of the tree platforms. The longest zip line is over 600 metres. Ziptrek s tours are available all year long. In 2008/09 Ziptrek did about 70,000 tours. Ziptrek s Tree Trek Tour Facilities Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 61 September 2013

79 Geocaching Whistler Geocaching Adventures offers an outdoor treasure hunt using GPS. participants use a GPS receiver or other navigational techniques to hide and seek containers called geocaches. A typical cache is a small waterproof container containing a logbook and a treasure. Whistler Geocaching Adventures had 37 guests in the summer of Snowshoe Tours and Dogsledding Outdoor Adventures offers snowshoe tours and dogsledding tours in various areas within Whistler Mountain s CRA that do not conflict with the ski area operation. Snowmobile Tours In the spring, if Whistler Mountain closes to skiers before Blackcomb Mountain does, Canadian Snowmobile Adventures will offer snowmobile tours on Whistler Mountain..16 Area Facilities Balance Throughout the previous sections, we have inventoried all of Whistler Mountain s existing facilities and subsequently analyzed the daily capacity of the following operational elements: lifts, trails, skier service buildings, food service, accommodation and parking. We have prepared a graphic representation of the overall area facilities balance in Plate II.9, which portrays an area that may be somewhat unbalanced. As shown in the graph below, the highest peak day ever was 15,828 with an average of the top 15 days at about 11,800 in the last 5 years. Although, the highest day ever experienced was over 15,800 skiers, the normal peak day in the last 10 years is in the range of 14,000-14,500. As shown in Plate II.7, both the lift capacity and trail capacity are in excess of the peak day, meaning that skiers should have quite a comfortable experience, as long as the entire mountain is open on those particular days. Unfortunately, the peak day exceeds the calculated SCC when the upper mountain is closed due to weather, a frequent occurrence, or a lack of snow such as in the first 1/3 of the 2008/09 season (Mode 2 SCC = 13,500). The calculated SCC when the lower mountain is closed due to lack of snow (Mode 3 SCC =15,520) is quite close to the peak day visit levels. As shown, overall built space for skier services is at about 10,800 skiers, which is about 1,000 skiers short of the design day (11,800 skiers per day), although there are specific facilities that have adequate floorspace. As described in detail previously, Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 62 September 2013

80 restaurant seats are in significant shortage with overall indoor seats only able to serve 6,600 skiers comfortably, including only 5,454 on-mountain, a significant shortage. Base area staging essentially matches the peak days, with maximum staging for the entire valley at 27,666 (equivalent to the peak days experienced at both mountains). Whistler s share is approximately 15,200 skiers, very close to the peak days experienced in the last few years. Whistler Mountain s out of valley staging capacity over a 2.5 hour period is adequate to stage the average of the top 15 busiest days over the past 5 seasons. Approximately 8 to 12 days per season staging times exceed Whistler Blackcomb s service goal of 2 hours, however, on a peak day there is enough lift capacity to stage all skiers within about 2.5 hours on average (although it is significantly higher on the Village Gondola and significantly shorter on the Fitzsimmons Express due to skier s preference for the weather protected direct route of the gondola). WHISTLER MOUNTAIN AREA FACILITIES BALANCE 20, /11 Peak Day 15,957 Skiers Capacity in Skiers Per Day 15,000 10,000 5,000 17,990 17,180 15,165 14,984 2,493 Average Top 15 Past 5 Seasons 12,500 Skiers 9,263 6,665 10,004 2,663 10,966 6,600 6,067 4,980 PLATE II.7 0 Lifts Trails Skier Services Food Seating Base Area Staging 2.5 Hour Staging Lifts Trails Indoor Seats Outdoor Seats Skiers from Parking Skiers from Accommodation Skiers from Transit Skier Services Creekside Village Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update II - 63 September 2013

81 III. MARKET.1 Classification of Winter Sport Sites Ecosign utilizes the British Columbia Government s system of classification of mountain resort types as outlined in the All Season Resort Guidelines. The mountain resorts fall into one of the following classifications: a) Community Facility b) Regional Facility c) Destination Facility The following section is a list of site development characteristics common to each of the above classifications. a) Community Mountain Resort Serves the local population Focused on weekend use and local needs No overnight accommodation b) Regional Mountain Resort Serves both local and regional populations Is entirely focused on regional use and local needs Has a limited number of beds, the majority of which are privately owned, low-key developments (i.e. cabins and cottages as compared to hotels and second homes) c) Destination Mountain Resort Serves local, regional and destination enthusiasts with an emphasis on catering to destination need and services Offers a unique and truly special mountain experience Provides a wide range of tourist facilities, for a total resort experience where lift-serviced skiing and snowboarding (although still the priority) are no longer the only attractions. International airport within a two to three hour drive. Significant bed base in close proximity to lifts and trails, including publicly available commercial beds (approximately % in close proximity to ski lifts and trails and other resort amenities), private bed subdivisions (approximately %), and resident-restricted employee housing (approximately %). Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 1 September 2013

82 Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains are part of the Whistler resort and together form the largest destination mountain resort in Canada..2 North American Ski Industry Overview United States The sport of skiing had its primary economic take-off point in the post-world War II period. While the physical plant and participation in the sport grew moderately during the 1950's, the 1960's ushered in an explosive era of ski development in North America, which centered in the Northeast Corridor, the Rocky Mountains and the West, with participation growing in excess of 15 percent per annum. While the North American average annual growth rate has leveled off, some regions continue to experience growth. Industry analysts have suggested that these growth regions (i.e. Colorado, California, Utah and British Columbia) have sustained their positive growth patterns through continued resort development; thereby substantiating the tenet that in winter snow sliding sports, supply creates demand. Other identifiable growth stimulators within the sport of skiing include: population growth; technological improvements of ski lifts, equipment, clothing, and slope grooming techniques; the parabolic or shaped skis, snowboarding, snow tubing, airline deregulation and co-operative packaging of lifts, equipment, transportation and accommodation, thus creating a total resort experience. In the latter part of the 1980's, growth in the North American skier market slowed considerably, with total visitation in the United States averaging around the 50 million level, and a high of 53.9 million in 1986/87. The 2000/01 season was a record-breaking season in terms of number of visits, with a total of approximately 57.3 million visits, a 5 percent increase over 1999/2000. This increase was attributed mainly to strong visitor numbers over the Christmas season and the average length of season increasing from the previous season. Snowfall accumulations were varied throughout the regions, but some areas reported a 12 percent increase in snowfall. Season pass sales increased in all regions and were also a contributing factor to the substantial increase in visitation for 2000/01. Over the long term, skier visitation has reached a new level, even with an aging population, up from a low of 47 million in 1990/91 to the all-time highest number of visits recorded in 2010/11 of million. In 2010/2011, a total of million skier visits were recorded in the US; a slight increase of 1.3 percent from the previous season and edging 0.1 percent ahead of the previous record set in 2007/08. This increase occurred due to several factors including record season-long snowfall, a longer operating season for some areas, as well as a surge in late season skier visits. This positive optimism may also be partially due to the perceived continual recovery Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 2 September 2013

83 from the global financial crisis from 2008 and an increase in consumer confidence. Travel and tourism in general continued to recover and the unemployment rate fell slightly. Skier visits decreased by 15.8 percent during the 2011/12 season, to 51.0 million from 60.5 million last season, the biggest year-over-year decline since the 17.6 percent drop in 1980/81. The drop in visits was largely due to a significant decrease in snowfall, the lowest average snowfall since 1991/92 and warm weather. U.S. ski resorts saw a healthy rebound in visitation in the ski season, reaching 56.6 million visits, primarily due to a much better snowpack. Plate I.1 illustrates the total skier visitation history for the United States from the 1978/79 to 2011/13 ski seasons. TOTAL SKIER VISITS UNITED STATES Million US Skier Visits / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /13 Season Ending Source: Kottke National End of Season Survey Report 2008/09 PLATE III.1 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 3 September 2013

84 Canada Total skier visits in Canada for the 2010/11 season were 19,227,000, an increase of 4.9 percent from the previous season s visits of 18,280,000. Overall, the Canadian Ski Industry was down 9% in skier visits between the 2007/08 season and the 2010/11 season. The 2007/08 ski season was exception in terms of a record high number of skier visits and also excellent snow conditions. Table III.1 summarizes the Canadian Historic Skier visitation for the past five seasons. TABLE III.1 CANADIAN HISTORIC SKIER VISITATION 2006/ /11 PROVINCE 2006/ /08 % Change 2008/09 % Change 2009/10 % Change 2010/11 % Change B.C./Yukon, Heliski 6,075,000 6,711, % 5,918, % 5,536, % 6,228, % Alberta 2,662,000 2,564, % 2,369, % 2,499, % 2,441, % Prairies 181, , % 236, % 275, % 212, % Ontario 3,267,000 3,551, % 3,443, % 3,359, % 3,399, % Quebec 6,345,000 7,085, % 6,233, % 6,109, % 6,438, % Atlantic 438, , % 509, % 502, % 509, % TOTAL 18,968,000 20,659, % 18,708, % 18,280, % 19,227, % Source: Canadian Ski Council 2011 In Western Canada, the British Columbia skiing industry grew at an annual rate of 6.1 percent since the 1984/85 season, as illustrated graphically in Plate III.2 and summarized in Table III.2. British Columbia s ski areas have aggressively expanded and improved their ski areas, assisted by favourable government policy and financial programs. Between 1998 and the season ending in 2008, British Columbia s visitation increased 44 percent to a record 6.47 million skier visits. By contrast, Alberta s ski industry had mixed results during the same period, with an average annual compound growth rate of only 3.9 percent. While visitation in Alberta improved between 1985 and 1990, skier visits were flat up to From 1995 to 2000, Alberta experienced a dramatic increase in skier visitation up to 2.59 million, the highest number ever recorded. Alberta visitation has fluctuated between 2.1 and 2.66 million visits since that time. The two provinces combined had record skier visit levels of over 9.0 million in the 2007/08 ski season. While visits have recovered somewhat from the recession in starting in the fall of 2008, they still have not reached the pre recession level. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 4 September 2013

85 TABLE III.2 RECORDED ANNUAL SKIER VISITS BRITISH COLUMBIA & ALBERTA 1984/85 TO 2011/12 ALBERTA BRITISH COLUMBIA TOTAL Total % No. Average Total % No. Average Total % No. Average Ski Skier Annual of Visits/ Skier Annual of Visits/ Skier Annual of Visits/ Season Visits Change Areas Area Visits Change Areas Area Visits Change Areas Area 1977/ / % 1979/ % % 1980/ % % 1981/ % % 1982/ % % 1983/ % % 1984/85 1,509, % ,140 2,761, % 33 83,667 4,270, , /86 1,576, % 16 98,549 2,428, % 33 73,584 4,005, % 49 81, /87 1,754, % 19 92,357 2,647, % 33 80,231 4,402, % 52 84, /88 1,508, % 22 68,562 3,196, % 36 88,782 4,704, % 58 81, /89 1,801, % 19 94,817 3,342, % ,277 5,144, % , /90 1,964, % ,372 3,188, % 33 96,634 5,152, % 52 99, /91 1,934, % 21 92,120 3,339, % ,716 5,273, % , /92 1,808, % 26 69,559 3,411, % 39 87,462 5,219, % 65 80, /93 1,574, % 25 62,965 3,799, % 41 92,660 5,373, % 66 81, /94 1,931, % 23 83,978 3,978, % ,028 5,910, % , /95 1,967, % 26 75,663 4,367, % ,983 6,334, % 68 93, /96 2,069, % 26 79,606 4,097, % 42 97,551 6,166, % 68 90, /97 2,191, % 26 84,290 4,390, % ,539 6,582, % 68 96, /98 2,040, % 26 78,462 4,502, % ,192 6,542, % 68 96, /99 2,559, % 26 98,432 5,590, % ,107 8,149, % , /00 2,589, % 29 89,279 5,901, % ,313 8,490, % , /01 2,119, % 29 73,087 5,387, % ,145 7,507, % , /02 2,561, % 30 85,367 6,176, % ,406 8,737, % , /03 2,363, % 28 84,408 5,491, % ,529 7,854, % , /04 2,417, % 28 86,341 6,045, % ,924 8,462, % , /05 2,335, % 28 83,420 4,527, % ,758 6,863, % , /06 2,402, % 28 85,814 5,758, % ,953 8,161, % , /07 2,662, % 28 95,104 5,998, % ,628 8,661, % , /08 2,564, % 28 91,578 6,470, % ,743 9,034, % , /09 2,368, % 28 84,600 5,826, % ,845 8,195, % , /10 2,499, % 28 89,256 5,452, % ,466 7,951, % , /11 2,440, % 28 87,164 6,148, % ,779 8,588, % , /12 2,383, % 28 85,107 6,116, % ,889 8,499, % ,797 Source: Canada West Ski Areas Association Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 5 September 2013

86 ANNUAL SKIER VISITS BRITISH COLUMBIA & ALBERTA 1984/85 TO 2011/12 7,000,000 6,000,000 5,000,000 SKIER VISITS 4,000,000 3,000,000 2,000,000 1,000, / / / / / / / / / / / / / /11 SKI SEASON Source: Canada West Ski Areas Association PLATE III.2 Summary Alberta British Columbia In conclusion, the ski industry has been impacted by global economics, travel patterns and different health crises. However, the core participants are passionate about the sport but are aware of the recession and its effects on recreation and leisure time, as well as the costs. Global health concerns may also impact the skier visitation for regional and destination travelers. Sensitivity to value is at its highest, with many resorts offering reductions in ticket prices. Generally, there is renewed optimism but substantial uncertainty remains. Marketing opportunities are huge for those resorts and ski areas near large metropolitan areas. Creative marketing emphasizing loyalty and value is needed. Destination markets are recovering but have not returned to previous highs. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 6 September 2013

87 As the Baby Boom ages, the ski industry faces many challenges in the future to maintain current levels of resort visitation, let alone finding markets for continued growth..3 Snowboarding The early emerging popularity and growth of snowboarding had a significant impact on many components of winter resort area operations. Snowboarding, initially viewed by many as an alternate or anti-establishment activity for mainly the younger, skateboarding crowd, showed steady growth initially. The increase in participation was due to several factors. In addition to interest from a younger generation, with more than 75 percent of snowboarders between the ages of 13-24, a growing number of advanced skiers who because of sport burn-out or skiing associated injuries, have chosen to give snowboarding a try and, in many cases are crossing over to the sport. In addition, because of the perception that snowboarding is far less technical and therefore easier to learn and progress, snowboarding is much more appealing to those who may or may not have tried skiing. Snowboarding showed a downward trend for the past two seasons, after reaching a plateau. Snowboarders made up 30.2 percent of resort visits during the 2011/12 season. Plate III.3 illustrates the change in the extent of snowboarding participation between 2007/08 and 2011/12. SNOWBOARDERS - AS A PERCENT OF TOTAL WINTER VISITS Snowboarders as a Percent of Total Visits 50% 45% 40% 35% 30% 25% 20% 15% 10% 5% 0% Northeast Southeast Midwest Rocky Mtn. Pacific Southwest Pacific Northwest Overall Region 2007/ / / / /12 Source: Kottke National End of Season Survey 2011/12 PLATE III.3 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 7 September 2013

88 .4 Snow Tubing In addition to skiing and snowboarding at winter resorts, many areas now offer snow tubing during the day and evenings. In 2004/05, approximately 46 percent of winter resort areas offered snow tubing. During the 2011/12 season, 53 percent of areas operating snow tubing. Plate.III.4 illustrates the percentage of areas which offer snow tubing. As shown, there are regional fluctuations in tubing operations with the Southeast the highest, at 94 percent and the Rocky Mountain region at 30 percent. PERCENTAGE OF RESORTS WITH SNOW TUBING Percentage of Resorts with Snow Tubing Northeast Southeast Midwest Rocky Mtn. Pacific Southwest Pacific Northwest Overall Average Region Source: Kottke National End of Season Survey 2011/12 PLATE III / / / /12 Plate III.5 illustrates the average number of visits at the tubing areas since the 2007/08 season. As shown, overall tubing visits on average have plateaued at approximately 23,000 per area. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 8 September 2013

89 UNITED STATES AVERAGE SNOW TUBING VISITS PER AREA Average Number of Snow Tubers per Resort 45,000 40,000 35,000 30,000 25,000 20,000 15,000 10,000 5, ,422 12,746 12,704 10,380 41,584 35,710 35,987 25,306 24,547 29,439 26,706 22,265 17,455 16,438 16,272 14,229 12,227 15,433 13,216 12,087 Northeast Southeast Midwest Rocky Mtn. Pacific Southwest 19,642 28,884 28,060 27,704 Pacific Northwest 23,903 23,717 23,141 Overall Average 18,369 Region 2008/ / / /12 Source: Kottke National End of Season Survey 2011/12 PLATE III.5.5 Historic Winter and Summer Visitation for Whistler Blackcomb Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains experienced substantial year over year growth in skier up until about the late 1990 s when it began to level off. Since the two mountains are side by side and linked by the PEAK 2 PEAK gondola it is common for both skiers and sightseers to visit both mountains in one day. A visit is recorded at the mountain where the guest rides their first lift of the day, which may or may not be the mountain on which they spend most of their day. Winter and summer visits for the eleven year period between 2002/2003 and 2011/13 but excluding the winter of 2009/10 and the summer of 2013 are listed in Tables III.3, III.4 and III.5. This provides ten years of data for each season. Over the ten year period winter season skier visits for the resort have fluctuated between 1.9 and 2.2 million with the ten year average being 2.0 million as illustrated in Plate III.6. After a significant drop in 2008/09 due to the economic recession, the visits have recovered to just over 2.0 million. The ten year average for winter season skier visits on Whistler Mountain is approximately 1.1 million. Whistler s share of the Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 9 September 2013

90 first rides for skiers has remained fairly consistent at 53 to 57% despite adjustments in the number of days each mountain has been open over the ten year period. WHISTLER BLACKCOMB HISTORIC SKIER VISITS 2,000,000 Winter Season Skier Visits 1,500,000 1,000, , Winter Season Ending Whistler Blackcomb PLATE III.6 While winter visits have stabilized, the summer visits have shown dramatic growth between 2003 and Summer sightseeing visits have grown from 147,500 in 2003 to 315,700 in 2009 the first summer the PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola was open. Visits to the Whistler Mountain Bike Park have been climbing steadily and in 2012 were more than double the 2003 level. The total visits for the 2011/12 winter combined with the 2012 summer were the highest ever recorded, indicating the increasing contribution from the summer season. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 10 September 2013

91 TABLE III.3 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB COMBINED VISITATION SEASONS ENDING Season Winter Summer Ending Skier Sightseer Biker Total Skier Sightseer Biker Total ,112,461 55,504-2,167,965 1, ,524 62, , ,045,111 60,914 8,709 2,114,734 3, ,321 68, , ,735,669 62,371 10,453 1,808,493 2, ,063 63, , ,983,687 79,743 6,912 2,070,342 2, ,765 91, , ,170,229 61,612 6,942 2,238,783 2, ,524 95, , ,196,514 63,230 8,770 2,268,514 2, , , , ,881,439 73,164 11,605 1,966,208 2, , , , n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. 42, , , , ,017,828 59,236 4,038 2,081,102 25, , , , ,131,729 61,635 5,277 2,198,641 22, , , , ,040,828 65,723 7,192 2,106,551 n.a n.a. n.a. n.a. Ten Year Average 2,031,550 64,313 6,990 2,102,133 10, ,695 97, ,848 Season TOTAL SUMMER & WINTER Ending Skier Biker Sightseer TOTAL ,113,885 62, ,028 2,379, ,048,218 77, ,235 2,386, ,738,004 74, ,434 2,028, ,985,784 98, ,508 2,391, ,172, , ,136 2,533, ,199, , ,149 2,567, ,884, , ,817 2,364, n.a. 126,525 n.a. n.a ,043, , ,086 2,501, ,154, , ,216 2,625, n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. Ten Year Average 2,042, , ,008 2,437,701 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 11 September 2013

92 TABLE III.4 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN VISITATION SEASONS ENDING Season Winter Summer TOTAL Ending Skier Sightseer Biker Total Skier Sightseer Biker Total Skier Sightseer Biker ,111,575 51,631-1,163, ,986 62, ,282 1,111, ,617 62, ,094,351 57,897 8,709 1,160, ,780 68, ,410 1,094, ,677 77, ,258 59,326 10,453 1,017, ,626 63, , , ,952 74, ,067,452 73,133 6,912 1,147, ,674 91, ,828 1,067, ,807 98, ,159,020 40,218 6,942 1,206, ,894 95, ,041 1,159, , , ,192,240 39,352 8,770 1,240, , , ,528 1,192, , , ,063,915 66,670 11,605 1,142, , , ,303 1,063, , , n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a , , ,735 n.a. n.a 126, ,092,683 46,852 4,038 1,143, , , ,379 1,092, , , ,156,295 50,101 5,277 1,211, , , ,963 1,156, , , ,094,298 54,351 7,192 1,155,841 1,094,298 54,351 7,192 Ten Year Average 1,097,909 53,953 6,990 1,158, ,927 97, , ,328 1,458, ,361 TABLE III.5 BLACKCOMB MOUNTAIN VISITATION SEASON ENDING Season Winter Summer TOTAL Ending Skier Sightseer Total Skier Sightseer Total Skier Sightseer ,000,886 3,873 1,004,759 1,384 20,538 21,922 1,002,270 24, ,760 3, ,777 3,107 29,541 32, ,867 32, ,411 3, ,456 2,335 10,437 12, ,746 13, ,235 6, ,845 2,097 21,091 23, ,332 27, ,011,209 21,394 1,032,603 2,159 14,630 16,789 1,013,368 36, ,004,274 23,878 1,028,152 2,931 15,456 18,387 1,007,205 39, ,524 6, ,018 2,810 32,278 35, ,334 38, n.a. n.a. n.a. 42,769 45,685 88,454 n.a. n.a ,145 12, ,529 25,823 42,765 68, ,968 55, ,434 11, ,968 22,406 15,254 37, ,840 26, ,530 11, ,902 n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. Ten Year Average 933,641 10, ,001 10,782 24,768 35, ,423 45,910 An analysis of the distribution of skier visits for Whistler Mountain is presented in Plate III.7. Since the installation of the Fitzsimmons Chair in 1999, which provided a second staging route out of Whistler Village, skier visits on Whistler Mountain on the busiest days have increased. Whistler Mountain s peak day was over 15,957 skiers on December 29, Over the last 6 years, the average of the Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 12 September 2013

93 top 15 busiest days on Whistler Mountain is 12,500 skiers and the 10,000 skier visit level is exceeded an average of 26 days per season. WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKIER VISIT DISTRIBUTION ANALYSIS 1998/99 TO 2012/ , , , Whistler Skiers 10,000 8,000 6,000 4,000 2, PLATE III.7 Days Over 10,000 Avg. Skiers/Day Peak Day Avg. Top 10 Avg. Top 15 Avg. Top 20 Avg. Top 30 Plate III.8 presents an analysis of the distribution of skier visits for the two mountains combined. The Peak Day ever experienced was approximately 27,400 skiers while the average Peak Day over the last 6 seasons is 25,900 skiers. The Average Top 15 days over the past 6 seasons is 22,640 skiers. The two mountains combined have exceeded 20,000 visits an average of 17 days over each of the last 6 seasons. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 13 September 2013

94 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB SKIER VISIT DISTRIBUTION ANALYSIS 1998/99 TO 2012/13 30, Whistler Blackcomb Skiers 25,000 20,000 15,000 10,000 5, Days Over 20,000 Avg. Skiers/Day Peak Day Avg. Top 10 Avg. Top 15 Avg. Top 20 Avg. Top 30 PLATE III.8 In summary, Whistler Blackcomb has experienced a leveling off of winter skier visits in the past few seasons, similar to other successful resorts in western North America. The summer visits, measured in mountain lift rides, however, have been increasing significantly as the Whistler resort continues to develop new summer attractions and events..6 Skier Visit Forecast The management of Whistler Blackcomb has prepared a forecast of winter season skier visits for the next twenty years which is presented in Table III.6 and illustrated in Plate III.8. Taking into account planned improvements for the mountain infrastructure, regional and global demographics and Whistler Blackcomb s dominant position in the British Columbia ski industry, the management team is predicting modest growth over the next twenty years. Fluctuations in the economy and the weather can significantly impact the skier visit levels. The improvements outlined in Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 14 September 2013

95 this Master Plan will be strategically implemented to allow Whistler Blackcomb to continue to provide a top quality experience for their guests. TABLE III.6 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB 20 YEAR SKIER VISIT FORECAST Seaon Whistler Blackcomb Whistler Ending Mountain Mountain Blackcomb ,156, ,434 2,131, ,094, ,540 2,040, ,229, ,400 2,120, ,235, ,600 2,130, ,241, ,800 2,140, ,252, ,200 2,160, ,261, ,500 2,175, ,267, ,700 2,185, ,276, ,000 2,200, ,281, ,200 2,210, ,287, ,400 2,220, ,296, ,700 2,235, ,302, ,900 2,245, ,307, ,100 2,255, ,316, ,400 2,270, ,322, ,600 2,280, ,331, ,900 2,295, ,336, ,100 2,305, ,342, ,300 2,315, ,348, ,500 2,325, ,357, ,800 2,340, ,363, ,000 2,350, ,371, ,300 2,365,000 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 15 September 2013

96 2,500,000 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB 20 YEAR SKIER VISIT FORECAST 2,000,000 Annual Skier Visits 1,500,000 1,000, , Whistler Mountain Season Ending Blackcomb Mountain PLATE III.8 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update III - 16 September 2013

97 IV. DEVELOPMENT ANALYSIS The purpose of the development analysis section is to blend the information and/or constraints identified in the inventory section with acceptable ski industry planning and design parameters. Specifically, the constraints imposed by climate (natural snowpacks, wind, solar exposure), surficial geology (depth to bedrock, potential hazards, high water table) and visual quality objectives have shrunk the overall size of the potential development area..1 Mountain Design Analysis Accurate topographic mapping is a prerequisite for good mountain planning. During the technical assessment phase, the planning team utilized topographic mapping at a scale of 1:5,000 with 5 metre contour intervals. The topography and planimetry is based on aerial photography taken in 2000, with some small edits made to the planimetry using 2006 aerial photography obtained from the RMOW. The 1:5,000 map encompasses approximately 5,250 hectares, covering the existing ski area and potential expansion areas south of Fitzsimmons Creek. Utilizing the newly prepared 1:5,000 topographic mapping, the most critical analysis map for the ski area design and evaluation process was prepared: the Slope Analysis Map (Figures 13a and 13b). This map delineates the areas that can be negotiated by the various skier ability levels, as well as areas that are considered too flat or too steep for the skiing public. The natural slope gradients were carefully measured and colour coded into the following five classifications: Slope Gradients Colour Type of Skiing 0-8% white flats, marginal skiing 8-25% green beginner and novice skiing 25-45% yellow intermediate skiing 45-70% blue advanced and expert skiing 70% + red extreme skiing, safety zones These maps were then utilized in the evaluation of the terrain and play a critical role in developing conceptual alternatives..2 Terrain Capacity Analysis We have analyzed the natural terrain within the Whistler Mountain Study Area which possesses good ski potential to accurately establish the area's overall ski development potential. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update IV - 1 September 2013

98 The Terrain Capacity Analysis Map graphically illustrates major terrain pods within the Study Area which possess good potential for ski development. The pods were selected by consulting the Slope Analysis Map and observing the following criteria: continuous fall line skiing from top to bottom suitable upper and lower lift terminal locations (e.g., 0.2 hectares less than 25 percent slope) good slope continuity to allow interesting skiing from top to bottom for one or more skier ability levels natural slope gradients primarily greater than eight percent and less than 70 percent Within each terrain pod, the upper and lower points are joined to establish the total vertical rise, horizontal distance, straight line slope and steepest 30 metre vertical pitch. The total pod area was measured and the terrain available for trail development was calculated. The above data comprises the inputs to our ski terrain capacity computer program. The final program input is a judgement which identifies the "primary" skier skill classification for each terrain pod. The program outputs are as follows: SKI TERRAIN - net developable ski terrain within the pod. It varies between 35 and 75 percent of the usable terrain within the pod depending on topography, vegetation and previous development in the pod. TOTAL SKIERS - in pod at acceptable skier densities. DEMAND VTM (000) - vertical transport metres required to service the total skiers. LIFT CAPACITY/HR. - the net hourly lift capacity necessary to maximize the development of each pod. The Terrain Capacity Analysis Map and program printout (Table IV.1) provide a reliable indication of the maximum development potential of each pod, the shelter and base terrain required to support the buildout of the mountain, and the lift capacity necessary to balance with the terrain. The terrain in the Whistler Mountain Study Area includes 24 pods suitable for ski development covering 2,060 hectares. These pods have a potential of supporting approximately 30,100 skiers on 1,088 hectares of developed terrain, as shown in Table IV.1. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update IV - 2 September 2013

99 TABLE IV.1 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN TERRAIN CAPACITY ANALYSIS Terrain Pod Top Elevation m. Bottom Elevation m. Total Vertical m. Horizontal Distance m. Slope Distance m. Average Slope % Skill Class Skier Density/Ha. A 1, ,540 1,579 23% , % , ,353 B 1,058 1, % % C 1,145 1, % , % ,224 D 1, ,680 1,744 28% , % ,370 1,106 2,358 E 1, ,160 2,269 32% , % , ,403 F 1,677 1, ,210 1,268 31% , % ,869 G 1,679 1, ,890 1,994 34% , % ,080 1,679 2,644 H 1,842 1, ,820 1,869 23% , % , ,062 I 1,854 1, ,160 1,192 24% , % , ,350 J 1,846 1, ,490 1,551 29% , % , ,246 K 2,006 1, ,040 1,073 25% , % , ,987 L 2,170 1, ,650 1,799 43% , % ,143 M 2,180 1, ,020 1,110 43% , % ,155 N 2,101 1, ,420 2,520 29% , % ,030 1,912 2,724 O 1,987 1, ,390 1,474 35% , % ,365 P 2,115 1, ,030 1,099 37% , % ,571 Q 2,040 1, ,520 1,576 28% , % ,170 1,897 4,538 R 1,840 1, ,210 1,249 26% , % ,760 1,053 3,387 S 2,010 1, ,018 32% , % ,705 T 1,966 1, ,600 1,696 35% , % , ,626 U 1, ,740 1,872 40% , % V ,060 1,096 26% , % W 1, ,860 1,944 30% , % ,480 1,195 2,111 X 1,830 1, ,390 2,524 34% , % ,540 2,050 2,525 TOTAL 10,755 36,608 2, , ,100 48,672 VTM Demand/Day Total Area Ha. % Ski Terrain Available Available Ski Terrain Total Skiers Demand VTM (000) Lift Capacity.Hr. The Terrain Capacity Analysis also provides an indication of the general balance of the developable terrain. The Terrain Pod Balance Statement (Table IV.2 and Plate IV.1) reveals that the natural terrain at Whistler Mountain is fairly well balanced with noticeable shortages of terrain in the beginner and novice skill classifications and a significant surplus of terrain in the high intermediate skill classification. The detailed design of new trails will incorporate terrain at various skill classifications and will attempt to ensure a ski area with trails well balanced with Whistler s skier market. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update IV - 3 September 2013

100 TABLE IV.2 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN TERRAIN POD BALANCE STATEMENT Skill Classification Hectares Skiers Balance Ideal 1 Beginner % 5% 2 Novice % 10% 3 Low Intermediate , % 20% 4 Intermediate , % 30% 5 High Intermediate , % 20% 6 Advanced , % 10% 7 Expert , % 5% Total 1, , % 100% Optimum Density = 31.5 Skiers/Hectare Weighted Demand = 4,641 VTM/Skier/Day WHISTLER MOUNTAIN TERRAIN POD BALANCE 40% 35% 30% Percent of Total Skiers 25% 20% 15% 10% 5% 0% Beginner Novice Low Intermediate Intermediate High Intermediate Advanced Expert PLATE IV.1 Terrain Pods Ideal Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update IV - 4 September 2013

101 .3 Future Whistler Valley Land Use The growth in population, annual skier visits, visitor room nights and peak days predicted in studies carried out for the Resort Municipality of Whistler (RMOW) in the late 1990 s, have for the most part not been realized. Although construction of the remaining undeveloped market beds in the Whistler village area and at Creekside has occurred, Tourism Whistler has not reported a corresponding increase in the number of sold room nights over the winter season. Paid winter season room nights peaked in 2000/2001 and have fluctuated with economic and snow conditions since then. The permanent resident population grew from 8,300 in 1997 to 9,900 in 2004 and has remained relatively constant ever since. Whistler s workforce grew from 12,500 full time equivalents (FTE) in 1998/99 to about 14,500 FTE in 2003/04 and has fluctuated up and down within a 500 FTE range since then. Accommodation The RMOW accommodation inventory that lists developed and undeveloped dwelling units and bed units by subdivision according to the Official Community Plan was updated for the Inventory section of this report. There are no significant undeveloped parcels within the Central Village Zone or at Creekside. All of the approved development within skier walking distance of the lifts has been completed. The only remaining large commercial accommodation to be developed is on the Holburn Lands (tennis centre) located between Village North and Montebello. The current owner is in the process of rezoning these lands from hotel to tourist accommodation with the intent of building market townhouses. The Baxter Creek and Rainbow neighbourhoods have the largest inventory of undeveloped sites for both townhouses and single family homes. The Cheakamus Crossing area has serviced market lots and unserviced expansion potential. There are also serviced single family lots in Cypress Place, Stonebridge, Lakecrest, Nita Lake and Kadenwood. Kadenwood is the only one of these areas that is ski-in/ski-out. In addition there are a few undeveloped lots scattered through the more mature neighbourhoods. The estimated total number of dwelling units in Whistler at buildout is approximately 17,285, as shown in Table IV.3. The current number of bed units allocated to development sites is 61,273. Not included in these totals is the RMOW owned parcel between the existing Alpine subdivision and the First Nations land that could be developed for employee housing in the future, the First Nations land in the Callaghan Valley, and several RR1 zoned sites within Whistler that don t currently have bed units associated with them. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update IV - 5 September 2013

102 TABLE IV.3 WHISTLER VALLEY DWELLING UNITS & BED UNITS BUILDOUT Totals Units Bed Units Single Family 3,103 18,618 Duplex 477 2,862 Multi-Family 4,161 15,222 Tourist Accommodation 3,117 9,044 Pension Hotel 3,745 7,970 Employee/Resident Restricted 2,020 6,744 RV/Campsites Hostel TOTAL 17,285 61,273 Assuming a return to historic peak period occupancy and skier participation rates as outlined below in Table IV.4, the number of skiers expected to be generated from accommodation within Whistler Valley on a peak day at buildout is approximately 26,620, as shown in Table IV.5. Adding in day skiers from outside of Whistler (Pemberton to the north and Squamish and the lower mainland to the south), at the rate of 20 to 25 percent of total skiers, as well as destination and weekend visitors who are on the first day of their trip (5 to 10 percent of all skiers), we anticipate peak day skier visit levels in the 35,400 to 39,300 level. For planning purposes we will assume a peak day at build out in the middle of this range at about 37,000 skiers on both mountains. Of these, only about 13,000 skiers (less than 35 percent) will be coming from accommodation either within skier walking distance of one of the existing valley staging lifts or on the free village shuttle route (areas shown shaded in green on the table), leaving between 22,500 and 26,300 skiers needing transportation to reach the lifts. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update IV - 6 September 2013

103 TABLE IV.4 PEAK DAY OCCUPANCY RATES AND SKIER YIELDS Hotel TA Multi Single Resident Hostel Camp- Family Family Restricted Pension ground Duplex Bed Unit Occupancy Rate 90% 80% 70% 60% 100% Skier Participation Rate 80% 80% 60% 50% 25% Skier Yield 72% 64% 42% 30% 25% TABLE IV.5 SKIERS FROM WHISTLER VALLEY ACCOMMODATION AT BUILDOUT PEAK DAY OCCUPANCIES Developed Bed Units at Buildout Hotel TA Multi Single Resident Hostel Camp- Family Family Restricted Skiers Pension ground Duplex South of Creekside ,286 3,360 2,312 3,400 Creekside - 1, , ,110 Between Creekside & Village 176 1,104 3,487 4, ,660 Whistler Village 3, ,320 Upper Village 1,674 3,491 3, ,160 Village North 1, , ,350 North of Village North 1, ,051 11,904 2,592 6,620 Totals 8,545 9,282 15,222 21,480 6,744 26,620 Day Skiers from Outside Whistler - 20 to 25% of all skiers 7,099 to 9,933 Weekend & Destination Skiers on First Day of Trip - 5% to 7% of all skiers 1,775 to 2,740 Total Skiers 35,493 to 39,293 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update IV - 7 September 2013

104 V. MOUNTAIN FACILITIES.1 Goals and Objectives The Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update 2013 is an update of the Whistler Mountain Master Plan This update is required due to changes in the destination ski resort industry, the evolving needs of skiers coming to Whistler Blackcomb advances in lift technology, and the requirement from the Province of British Columbia to provide an updated plan that both documents all the improvements to the ski area that have taken place since the last Master Plan was submitted and provides a revised vision for the ski area going forward. Since the last Master Plan Update in 1998, overall skier visits at Whistler Blackcomb have increased substantially, from 1.7 million during the 1996/97 season to almost 2.2 million during the 2001/02 and 2007/08 seasons, fluctuating somewhat during those years. Although skier visits for the 2008/09 season were slightly lower because of a below normal snowpack, high avalanche danger and the global economic crisis, Whistler Blackcomb still received around 1.9 million skier visits. From the inception of Blackcomb in 1980 until their big expansion in 1987, Whistler was the dominant player with over 60 percent of the combined visits. After Blackcomb expanded, they took over the majority of skier visits until after Intrawest purchased Whistler in 1997 and made a concerted effort to move the larger proportion of skiers to the larger Whistler Mountain. Since the construction of the Fitzsimmons Express, Whistler has attracted between 54 and 57 percent of the total skier visits on a daily basis. Within Whistler, heavier traffic has also become a concern with the Whistler Village Gondola occasionally exceeding comfortable staging capacity and the Village core and the Resort Municipality approaching buildout. Common ownership of both Blackcomb and Whistler Mountains has provided an opportunity for the two mountains to work together more effectively and new facilities can be directed towards both mountains in a strategic manner to optimize the customer experience and attract more skiers to the resort. The opening of the PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola in December 2008 has allowed skiers to move easily between the alpine areas of the two mountains. The Master Plan includes the retrofitting of existing equipment, integrated with the addition of new terrain and facilities. The objectives of the Whistler Mountain Master Plan are as follows: Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-1 September 2013

105 Optimize the use of and operational efficiency of the existing physical plant. Balance lift and trail capacities. Provide maximum capacity for minimum capital and operating costs. Balance mountain capacity with skier services. Replace or retrofit aging equipment. Provide base staging areas in balance with mountain facilities. Each phase of development must provide an optimally balanced facility, while at the same time move toward the ultimate goal. Retain plan flexibility to respond to changing market demands and technological improvements. Define the ultimate planning goals to guide management and inform public agencies during the ensuing five to ten-year period. The following section presents descriptions of the proposed installation of new equipment and the upgrading of older facilities. We have utilized a number and letter code to indicate the type of lift installations proposed. The coding is illustrated below: MC T-Bar 3C 4C D4C D4C-B D6C D8C D6C/8G D6G D8G D10G 3S Moving Carpet Conveyor Lift T-bar Surface Lift Triple Chairlift Fixed Grip Quadruple Chairlift Fixed Grip Detachable Quadruple Chairlift Detachable Quadruple Chairlift with Bubble Detachable Six-Passenger Chairlift Detachable Eight-Passenger Chairlift Combi Lift; Six Chair and Eight-Passenger Gondola Detachable Six-Passenger Gondola Detachable Eight-Passenger Gondola Detachable Ten-Passenger Gondola 3 Cable Gondola (PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola) The major lift construction during the last 10 years was on Whistler Mountain, with the installation of the Fitzsimmons and Garbanzo chairs in 1999, the Symphony Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-2 September 2013

106 Express in 2006 (also expanding the skiable terrain) and the installation of the PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola in 2008, which now connects Whistler Mountain to Blackcomb Mountain. In the summer of 2013, the Harmony Express D4C was replaced with a detachable six passenger chairlift and the use Harmony equipment was moved to the Crystal area on Blackcomb. Whistler Blackcomb management has undertaken a detailed review of events since the last major expansion phase, as well as the needs for the future. The general conclusions are discussed below. a). Operations Over the last 20 years, Whistler Mountain has successfully replaced many of its old ski lifts with new technology lifts in the form of detachable quadruple chairlifts for return cycle skiing and six and eight-passenger gondolas for access. Whistler s lift configuration, as of September 2013, consists mostly of the new technology lifts, although there are still 2 fixed grip chairlifts (Olympic and Franz s) and two T-Bars which range in age from 47 years (T-Bar 1) to 26 years (Franz s installed using old Peak Chair equipment). Since the last Master Plan was prepared in 1998, Whistler Mountain has replaced the Roundhouse and the skier service buildings in the Creekside base with new, impressive and more efficient buildings, as well as constructed the Chic Pea mountain restaurant. Although the new facilities have added to the skier capacity and the skier experience, they can still be overcrowded on busy days and the analysis in the Inventory section shows that there is still a pressing need for more on-mountain indoor restaurant seats to accommodate the existing levels of skier visits. b). Market Skier visitation at Whistler Mountain has increased substantially substantially, from 577,647 during the 1990/91 season to almost 1.2 million in 2006/07 and 2007/08. Combined skier visits at Whistler Blackcomb exceeded the 2 million mark for the first time in 1998/1999 with the highest number of visits occurring in 2007/08 at just under 2.2 million. With the increased accommodation capacity constructed since 1998 and the remaining outstanding approved development potential within the RMOW, skier visits could reach the 2.8 million mark with a return to historic accommodation occupancy levels. An increase to 2.8 million skiers would be almost a 36 percent increase over the average visit level of the last 6 years and a 27 percent increase over the 2007/2008 season. To maintain and improve the skier experience at Whistler, the skier capacity must increase at an equal or faster pace than the anticipated increase in skier visits. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-3 September 2013

107 To maintain and improve the skier experience at Whistler, the skier capacity must increase at an equal or faster pace than the anticipated increase in skier visits. Since Blackcomb Mountain is very close to buildout in terms of available terrain capacity, much of the needed increase in capacity will likely occur at Whistler Mountain. The resort as a whole and Whistler Mountain in particular, must maintain and improve its attractiveness for all market segments to meet guest s increasing expectations. It is considered that all skiers, in particular local and regional skiers, desire more terrain and terrain variety, as well as improved skier service facilities and easier access to the mountain. Competition for destination skiers is fierce with new and improved products coming on line in Colorado, Utah, California, Oregon and elsewhere in British Columbia. Whistler Blackcomb must compete with these regions in value, quality, service and amenities. c). Ski Terrain Whistler Mountain presently requires more beginner, intermediate and high intermediate terrain to improve the overall ski terrain balance. Whistler Mountain (and Blackcomb Mountain) is well known for the quality and extent of expert and double black diamond terrain, which should also be maintained. Improved access to these areas should also be undertaken, wherever possible. At the same time, a good balance between the lift and trail systems must be maintained. To improve the overall skiing experience, small renovations to trails may be necessary in many different areas over the years, ranging from regrading to widening, etc. A reorganization of skier service spaces and operations facilities will also be needed as operational changes are made to respond to the need for a high quality guest experience. Figure 14a graphically illustrates the Whistler Mountain Master Plan at buildout. Whistler Mountain still has three major areas which can be exploited to increase terrain extent and variety, namely: Flute Peak and Basin Whistler Westside/Southside including Bagel Bowl and Khyber Pass areas Infilling between Emerald and Harmony Chairs Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-4 September 2013

108 .2 General Concept Since the 1998 Master Plan was filed, Whistler Mountain has completed the lift and skier service work proposed for Phase 12, and certain portions of the lift, trail and skier service work proposed for Phases 13, 14 and 15. Lifts installed include the Peak Express D4C, Franz s 3C, Fitzsimmons Express D4C-B, Garbanzo Express D4C, Symphony Express D4C and the PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola linking the two mountains. The Harmony Express, a detachable quadruple chair was replaced with the Harmony 6, a detachable six passenger chair in Significant trail development in the Garbanzo and Symphony zones was also completed in conjunction with the lift construction. Skier service improvements include replacement of the Roundhouse restaurant in 1998, redevelopment of the Creekside base area starting in 2002 (including a new guest services area, children s ski school facility and a restaurant/bar) and the construction of the Chic Pea restaurant in With the consolidation of the two mountains, the facility beside the Longhorn (now known as the Garbanzo Bike & Bean or Essentially Blackcomb) also came under Whistler s control and provides guest services, coffee shop, accessory retail, rentals, etc. There are also several rental and retail outlets near the base of the lifts in the Village and Upper Village that are operated by Whistler Blackcomb. Future plans for Whistler Mountain include adding new lifts and trails in Symphony Bowl (on Flute Mountain) and on the west and south flanks of the mountain, as well as upgrading several existing lifts, improving existing trails and adding more access capacity. Beginner zones will be expanded and renovated to improve the experience for learning skiers, both enrolled in ski school and learning on their own. As part of the future of Whistler Mountain, management has also expressed a desire to increase the quality of the recreation experience (fewer lift lines, better ski school experience, more restaurant space, etc.) in conjunction with increasing the quantity of skiing as required by increases in skier visitation in the future. In addition, the size of the mountain ensures that weather conditions are quite varied at different elevations and exposures on the mountain, meaning that operations and the popularity of any given lift can differ quite drastically on any busy day of the season. In addition to the new or replacement lifts outlined in this Master Plan, existing lifts will need to be replaced as they reach the end of their service life. All lift installations or replacements will be with state of the art lift technology that will best integrate with the overall mountain operation. In the following section, the Master Plan is described and divided into an anticipated three major phases of development, as illustrated on Figure 14a. However, the phasing of new lifts or lift upgrades may differ from that outlined in this report as Whistler Blackcomb reacts to changing market needs for additional terrain or additional lift capacity in certain areas. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-5 September 2013

109 Phase 15 Phase 16 Phase 17 Upgrade and expand the current skier learning facilities in and around Olympic Meadows, upgrade the Emerald lift and add the Yellow Express (adding capacity to improve skier circulation in the two most popular zones on the mountain). Increase the staging capacity out of Creekside Base, replace Franz s Chair and the T-bars, and expand lift service into Bagel Bowl. Continue development of the Westside for return cycle skiing, increase skier access and build more lift capacity in Symphony Bowl. Construct two new base areas on the southside/westside of the mountain to take the pressure off the Village and Creekside portals. In addition to the new lifts and trails, Whistler Blackcomb may to choose to add additional snow play structures similar to the existing Tree Fort. These ski to play structures nestled in the trees can add a sense of adventure and discovery for children in ski school and for families skiing with small children. The Master Plan Summary as shown in Table V.1 and graphically illustrated on Figure 14a, lists the facilities anticipated in each phase of development including lift development, trail development and skier service buildings (operational buildings and infrastructure not included). It should be noted that market forces, equipment technology, availability of capital, company strategies, etc., may alter the order that facilities are constructed, similar to the situation following previous Master Plans. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-6 September 2013

110 TABLE V.1 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI AREA DEVELOPMENT SUMMARY Phase Lifts Installed Trails Restaurants/ Base Lodges Replaced/Upgraded Lifts: Lift I(R) - Olympic Combi Lift - D4C/8G pph Olympic Chair Regrading WASP Facility at Olympic Lift F(R) - Emerald Upgrade - D6C pph Olympic Meadows Reconfig. Olympic Restaurant New Learning Center at Top of Kadenwood Lift Yellow Chair Trail Infill CLC Expansion 15 New Lifts: Learning Center Trail Piccolo Restaurant & Lodge Lift P- Yellow Chair - D4C pph Mountain-wide Minor Trail Symphony Restaurant Olympic Meadows Reconfiguration Regrading & Widening Peak Mountain Top Restaurant (including new beginner lifts) Patrol Huts New Lifts: Orange Restaurant Lift L -Orange Gondola - D8G pph Finale & Bagel Bowl Trails Orange Beginner Facility Lift T - D4C pph Learning Center Trails and/or WMSC hut replacement 16 Lift U - Bagel Bowl Express (S) - D6C pph Bagel Top Restaurant New Learning Center at Top of Orange Lift Bagel Bowl Restaurant Replaced/Upgraded Lifts: Mountain-wide Minor Trail Symphony Base Restaurant Lift K(R) - Franz's Express - D4C pph Regrading & Widening Bagel Bowl Patrol Hut New Lifts: Lift Oa - Flute Express - D6C pph Flute Trails or Lift Ob - Flute Shoulder - D4C pph Westside Trails Raven's Nest Expansion Lift M - Robertson's - 3C or 4C pph Southside Trails Flute Peak Patrol Hut 17 Lift W - Big Timber Gondola - D8G pph Egress Trail to Cheakamus Expand Bagel Bowl Restaurant Lift V - Kyber Express - D4C pph Whistler South Base Daylodge Lift X - Acess Gondola - D8G pph Mountain-wide Minor Trail Cheakamus Base Daylodge Lift Y - Whistler South - D6C pph Regrading & Widening Lift Z - Whistler South - 4C pph New Learning Center at Whistler South Ski Lifts Over time, the last of the older lifts on Whistler Mountain will be replaced with detachable grip lifts and the remaining fixed grip chair(s) will be used for one time egress purposes. Even newer detachable lift equipment may need to be replaced as it reaches the end of its service life. Replacement lifts on the lower mountain will be gondolas or chairs equipped with a cover or bubble to protect skiers from inclement weather experienced from time to time at the lower elevations. Since the master plan extends over a long period of time, lift technology will surely evolve and market trends and demand will shift, therefore, the master plan must remain flexible. As a consequence, the detailed phasing of the ski lifts may well change to reflect changes in technology or market conditions. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-7 September 2013

111 .3 Phase 15 Lifts The Olympic Meadows area at the 1,000-metre elevation is the best and most popular beginner area in the entire resort, however it fills beyond capacity on some days and is missing some micro-steps in learning progression. Therefore, a reconfiguration of the lifts and terrain in this area is proposed to better serve the ski school and beginner skier progression. More small beginner lifts and the appropriate trails will be developed to provide the best learning experience possible. Modifications will include moving and adding small lifts such as moving carpets, handle tows, platters, etc., as well as reconfiguring the entire Olympic chair zone as described below. The Olympic chair (Lift I) is proposed to be upgraded to a Combi Lift (combination detachable chairlift and gondola cabins) in a similar location. The top terminal will be moved slightly downhill and to the skiers right to provide more separation from the skier traffic coming down the Upper Olympic trail onto the It Happens trail. The bottom terminal will also be moved slightly eastward to make space for the skier traffic and for the expansion of moving carpets in this zone used for teaching adults. The exact site plan will be determined when arrangement of the entire learning area is designed for construction. Trails in this area will need significant regrading to make the area more suitable for providing slopes with a natural progression for learning, as currently there are portions of the existing trails that are either too flat or too steep for the anticipated uses. Adjacent to the new Olympic lift, two trails with different slope gradients and character are proposed so that two separate levels of skiers are able to use this terrain. The creation of a bypass route for end of the day egress from the upper mountain that does not interfere with the beginner zone is proposed along the skiers right side of the existing trail. The Whistler Village Gondola (Lifts A & B) was originally installed in 1988 with 10-passenger cabins to provide direct access from the Village to the Roundhouse area. Because of its high use year round for skiers, bikers and sightseers, it was recently in need of renewal and in the summer of 2008, most of the running line equipment was replaced. While this upgrade had no perceptible effect for the guests, the equipment now has improved availability and will be reliable for many years to come. This equipment renewal also provides the option to replace the existing stand up gondola cabins in the future with 8-passenger sit-down cabins. With new cabins, a rated capacity of 2,800 pph could be achieved, which is slightly higher than the existing 2,640 pph. Whistler Blackcomb plans to perform the cabin upgrade in the near future. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-8 September 2013

112 The Yellow Chairlift (Lift P), a detachable quadruple chairlift rated at 2,400 people per hour, is proposed for zone between the Harmony 6 and Emerald Express chairs. This lift will service trails from Green Acres/Coyote/Bobcat through Ratfink and Chunky s Choice and provide additional upper mountain lift capacity when the Harmony chair is closed due to avalanche risk or high winds. New trails in the eastern part of this zone could be constructed several years prior to installation of the chairlift, as most of the terrain is also accessible from either the Harmony or Emerald chairlifts. These trails will range in difficulty from low intermediate to expert, due to the wide variety of gradients in this terrain pod. The variety of slopes in this pod and the naturally wide spacing of the trees in the eastern part of this pod make it a natural playground and therefore would provide an ideal zone for a terrain park or an entire pod of natural and man-made terrain features for skiers and snowboarders alike. The bottom terminal of the Yellow chair is slightly east of the bottom of Bobcat for easy access from that trail and on the existing Sidewinder trail, so that skiers can still easily access the bottom of the Emerald Chair or ski to Whistler Village when the lift shuts down or they simply decide to ski elsewhere (Sidewinder will be realigned below the lift terminal). This lift will have a vertical drop of 395 metres and a length of approximately 1,660 metres. The Emerald detachable quad chair (Lift F) along with the Harmony 6 (Lift D), are the two most popular chairs on the mountain. The Emerald lift experiences long lines on virtually every weekend day and holiday, due both to the popularity of its terrain and its function as part of the access to the top of the mountain via Fitzsimmons and Garbanzo. In addition to these crowding issues, in the Inventory section it was determined that there is an excess of trail capacity in this zone. Therefore the existing chair is proposed to be replaced with a detachable 6 or 8- passenger chairlift with a higher capacity. Dave Murray National Training Centre The Dave Murray National Training Centre (DMNTC) has been set up as a permanent alpine ski training legacy from the 2010 Olympic and Paralympic Winter Games. Lower Raven and Ptarmigan were widened, regraded and received upgraded snowmaking so that they could be used as a training area during the games. Whistler Blackcomb, Canadian SnowSports Association and the Whistler Mountain Ski Club (WMSC) have formed a partnership to create a world class training facility on the Raven Ptarmigan run serviced by the Garbanzo Express. In addition to the runs, The Dave Murray National Training Centre will contain a start building at the top of Lower Raven, a slalom start building at the top of the slalom course, a 2 storey finish building at the bottom of the DMNTC, timing facilities, video training equipment and a surface lift servicing the slalom hill on It Happens. The finish building will contain training space for racers using the facility and will be equipped for viewing of video Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-9 September 2013

113 analysis of the training runs. The National Training Centre will be developed by a non profit society created by the partnership and is intended to be managed by WMSC. The layout of the Dave Murray National Training Centre is illustrated in Figure 14b. Trails As mentioned in the previous section, the beginner zones above Olympic Station will be reconfigured to more efficiently use that space for a greater number of guests. This measure will include reconfiguration of the locations of lifts and learning areas and possible regrading, but may also include expanding the trails into currently treed or unused space. In preparation for the new Yellow Chair (Lift P) and to provide more skiing and snowboarding in this zone, several runs are proposed to be cut in the zone between Green Acres and the Harmony Chair (Lift D), including the creation of more lightly gladed terrain. To maintain and improve the overall skiing experience, small renovations to existing trails may be necessary in many different areas over the years, ranging from regrading to widening, etc. Several of these projects already identified include widening the area surrounding the intersection of Crabapple & Sleeping Cloud, widening Upper Olympic adjacent to the bottom of Emerald chair, recontouring and/or widening upper Whiskey Jack, widening Upper Franz s and widening and recontouring areas to construct the NTC (National Training Centre). Many other minor projects of this scale have been identified over the years and some will be realized as they become priorities and as capital becomes available. Mountain Restaurants During Phase 15, a new mountain restaurant is proposed for the Olympic Station area. The new restaurant could be located partially on top of, or adjacent to the existing Olympic Station building. This restaurant will service beginner skiers in the Olympic zone, as well as skiers in the Garbanzo zone and skiers using terrain accessed from the upper and lower sections of the Village Gondola. This building will also contain restrooms and may contain ski school/guest services and/or accessory retail. The new facilities proposed at Olympic Station along with the existing Children s Learning Centre and direct gondola access, make this a good location to develop a major adventure zone destination that could offer a variety of recreational and/or educational activities in both summer and winter that would Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-10 September 2013

114 complement skiing. These activities could take place during the day and evening and could be a combination of indoor and outdoor activities. This area could be used entirely as a base for activities, or used as a staging point for activities. Small food service and warming facilities are proposed for the top of the Peak and in the Piccolo Saddle, near the top of the Symphony Express chairs during this phase. These new facilities would have 100 to 150 seats, slightly larger than the Crystal and Horstman Huts on Blackcomb, serving mostly prepared foods that simply require warming rather than frying or extensive cooking. These facilities would provide spectacular views and be extremely popular spots for lunch and rest breaks during the winter, as well as providing a destination for summer sightseers. Patrol facilities and public washrooms should be incorporated into each of these buildings. The small Harmony Tea House at the top of the Harmony lift will be replaced by a mountain restaurant on the small peak just east of the existing hut. The new facility will have 100 to 150 seats with spectacular views in all directions. The existing Tea House can be used as a patrol facility. A moderate sized restaurant (400 to 500 indoor) seats is proposed for the bottom of the Harmony Express. Although this restaurant site would not have as spectacular views as a mountain top location, it is located in a weather protected area where skiers congregate naturally. This restaurant will also be an attractive area for many of the skiers from the Symphony Bowl who wish to warm up and have lunch while still remaining in that general area. In addition to the indoor restaurant seats, this building would provide restroom facilities and small spaces for retail sales and large open deck areas for warm sunny days. Another small restaurant and/or warming facility may be constructed at the bottom of the Symphony lift to provide shelter and food for skiers wanting to remain in the Symphony/Flute area instead of moving to Harmony. This location is very protected from the elements and is adjacent to two major return cycle skiing lifts at buildout. There are currently portable restrooms in this location, which, at a minimum, would need to be expanded when the Flute Chair is added in the final phase. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-11 September 2013

115 .4 Phase 16 Lifts Whistler Mountain already has some overcrowding issues at the Creekside base several times per year resulting in very long lift lines to access the ski area. The 1,268-stall day skier parkade is the first opportunity for day skiers from south of Whistler to park. The Creekside redevelopment provided a large public accommodation bed base and convenient transit drop-off facilities, resulting in days when over 5,500 skiers access the ski area through this portal. The return cycle skiing trails serviced by the Creekside gondola; Lower Dave Murray, Lower Franz s, as well as Peak to Creek are some of the best high intermediate cruising trails on the mountain when conditions are ideal, causing skiers to want to return ski during the morning upstaging period further exacerbating the lift line situation. In addition, with the development of the Cheakamus Crossing neighbourhood, the proposed Park n Ride at Function Junction, as well as the fact that the PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola makes access to Blackcomb easy from Creekside, it is anticipated that there will be increased demand for staging through this portal. The increased demand will be mitigated by installing a new gondola, (Lift L) linking the Creekside base with the knoll at the top of the Garbanzo Lift H. The bottom terminal will be located adjacent to the existing Creekside gondola and the top will be located near the existing fuel depot at approximately the 1,676-metre elevation, giving the lift a total vertical rise of about 1,023 metres. From this top terminal, skiers can easily access any of the lifts in the mid mountain area or access the upper mountain using the existing Big Red Chair (Lift E) the new Franz s Lift K (R) or Emerald Lift F (R) both with increased capacity in Phase 15. The fuel depot will be relocated in conjunction with construction of this lift and a mountain restaurant and Learning Centre will be constructed nearby. The Orange Gondola (Lift L) should be installed with a capacity in excess of 2,000 pph; the exact capacity will depend on many factors at the time of installation including anticipated needs (depending on Park n Ride capacity & operations, transit, anticipated contribution of skiers from nearby increases in accommodation, etc.), cost of construction, advances in lift technology and market projections in the medium to long term. In addition to skier access, this lift will likely be quite attractive from a return skiing perspective, as it will allow skiers to return ski the entirety of the Dave Murray or Franz s trails from top to bottom. In conjunction with the installation of the Orange Gondola, a Learning Centre is proposed near the top of the Garbanzo lift. The terrain at the Creekside base is unsuitable for beginners because of the slope, space and snow conditions, therefore it should be moved up the mountain where conditions are better suited for this purpose. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-12 September 2013

116 With the installation of the Orange Gondola, skiers can both upload and download to the Learning Centre. The proposed restaurant will provide food, restrooms and warming facilities close by. The proposed location is quite protected from the wind and has terrain that can be used for a skier/snowboarder Learning Centre with some terrain modification. The Learning Centre would include several moving carpets and a walk-up learning area to provide suitable terrain for the first few steps of learning. The existing ski club cabin in this area could be converted, replaced and/or expanded for use by beginners and children and the ski club functions could be relocated to another building located elsewhere in the area or incorporated into the finish building for the Dave Murray National Training Centre. The most important and most exciting return cycle skiing lift proposed for the Westside zone is the Bagel Bowl (Lift U), stretching from the 1,365-metre elevation on the westside, up to the bench above Cockalorum at the 1,970-metre elevation. This lift services 605 vertical metres of terrain in the intermediate to expert skill classes. Some of this terrain (West Bowl, Bagel Bowl, Love Canal/Peak to Creek) is already popular ski terrain and several new trails below treeline will be cut to provide additional trails serviced by this lift. To access the Bagel Bowl lift and provide easy egress from the bottom of the Bagel Bowl lift, a new detachable chairlift named Lower Finale (Lift T) has been proposed for the terrain pod below the Grand Finale ski trail out of Lower Whistler Bowl. This lift will allow skiers from the westside lifts to get back up to Highway 86 without having to ski all the way down to Creekside. From Highway 86, they can make their way to Mid-station Road and then Expressway if they wish to go back to Whistler Village. Several trails are also proposed for this pod, falling almost exclusively in the advanced and expert skill classes, although skiers in the intermediate and high intermediate skill classes can use Highway 86/Franz s Trail or Peak to Creek to return ski on this lift. Skiers in the intermediate skill classes can easily access the bottom of the lift to move towards or away from the Bagel Bowl lift. Access from the existing ski area to this lift is via Crossroads or Mid Franz s. This lift could initially be installed as a fixed grip quad chair to make the Bagel Bowl project more economical. The exact location of the bottom terminal of the Lift T depends partly on determining where access trails can practically cross the adjacent creeks. An upgrade of Franz s Chair (Lift K/R) to a detachable quadruple chairlift in a slightly different alignment is proposed to provide better service to guests skiing in this zone and also provide the third high capacity link in the second staging route from the Village and Creekside to the mountain top. By placing the top station on the ridge above the top of the existing T-bars, this lift will effectively replace the existing Franz s fixed grip triple chair and the two T-bars as well as provide better access to Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-13 September 2013

117 Glacier and Harmony Bowl than the existing T-bars provide. The new lift has a total length of 1,782 metres and a total vertical rise of 385 metres. Even with the longer alignment of this lift, the ride time on a detachable lift will be approximately 5.9 minutes, almost 3 minutes shorter than the 8.8 minute ride on the existing Franz s Chair. New trails will be cut to service the Bagel Bowl (Lift U) and Lift T chairlifts. The upper elevations of the terrain serviced by the Bagel Bowl lift are mostly untreed, but the bottom is located in a heavily treed area, therefore, there will be little tree cutting needed at the higher elevations, selective cutting at the mid elevations and significant tree removal at the lowest elevations. Lift T is located completely within well treed areas on fairly steep slopes; therefore, the trails proposed for this area are designed as traditionally cut trails, requiring tree removal ranging from 25 to 50 metres wide. Mountain Restaurants A new mountain restaurant adjacent to the top of the Orange gondola is proposed to supplement the food services currently in short supply on the mountain, as well as to provide a destination for skiers and sightseers coming from Creekside. This facility could also be designed to hold functions smaller than those currently held at the Roundhouse, since it would have direct gondola access similar to the Roundhouse. Located on the south side of the lift, the restaurant will have southern exposures and views towards the Peak and down valley. Two restaurants are proposed for the Westside of the mountain in Phase 16; a hut at the top of the Bagel Bowl lift with 75 to 150 seats and a larger restaurant facility (300 to 400 seats) at the bottom of the same lift (Lift U). Both of these facilities will be accessible from Lift U and the Peak chair. The restaurant at the top of Bagel Bowl will have expansive views and southern exposures, but is located at a high elevation above treeline and will be very susceptible to inclement weather. The restaurant at the bottom of the lift will be the primary food service facility in this zone, allowing skiers using this area to remain in the area rather than going all the way back to Raven s Nest or the Roundhouse to get food and shelter and then restaging to get back to the Bagel Bowl area. The restaurant near the bottom terminal will also include restrooms, a small retail shop and may include some guest services for ski school and general information. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-14 September 2013

118 .5 Phase 17 Symphony Bowl Lifts A detachable six-passenger chairlift is proposed for the east side of Symphony Bowl, rising up onto Flute Mountain either onto the peak of Flute or the northern shoulder (Oa and Ob as shown in the Mountain Master Plan map Figure 14a). Lift Oa, rises to the peak of Flute and provides skiing access to the entirety of the north and west flanks of Flute with little or no hiking. Option Ob, located on the lower northern shoulder, provides gravity access to about one-half of the terrain on Flute, with the remainder of the skiing accessible via a short hike accessible from below the top of Symphony chair (like the existing situation) or from the top of the Option Ob lift. The Flute lift services low intermediate through expert terrain on slopes which are untreed in the upper elevations, transitioning to naturally gladed and then densely forested slopes as one skis down to the lift base. Trails in the mid and lower elevations will require some tree cutting and limited grading and summer grooming. The Flute chair will require some new trails to be cut below treeline and selected tree removal in the gladed zones. Areas above treeline areas may also need limited fine grooming to provide an ideal skiing surface at the beginning of the season. The Robertson s Chair (Lift M) is a fixed grip chairlift proposed to connect the bottom of the Flute and Symphony chairlifts with Harmony Ridge so that skiers can egress from Symphony Bowl if weather or mechanical issues render the Symphony Bowl lift(s) inoperable. In addition to providing egress from Symphony Bowl, it will also provide limited return cycle skiing on the expert only slopes of Robertson s and Harvey s, etc. A second option for egress from Symphony Bowl has also been explored; a T- bar or platter surface lift stretching from a point 750 metres from the Symphony lift at 9 percent downhill grade up to the end of the Burnt Stew Road (above the Harmony chair bottom terminal); the total length of the lift is about 600 metres. This surface lift would be operated intermittently, likely only in emergency situations and/or at the end of the day. Westside/Southside The 1982 Ski Area Master Plan reserved terrain to the west of the Controlled Recreation Area for Whistler Mountain s future expansion and the 1991 and 1998 Master Plans identified several lifts and a base area to be developed in this zone. This terrain is now within the CRA and Phase 17 describes the revised plans for further development of lifts, trails and base area development within this area, including two staging portals. Depending on the future of the hill, how Whistler Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-15 September 2013

119 Resort continues to develop, transportation problems and solutions, etc., this base may be required after completion of the rest of the ski area, or possibly at an earlier date. This phase will see the creation of a new day skier base area above Millar s Pond and Cheakamus Crossing (accessible from Function Junction/Cheakamus Crossing via a new access road), one exclusively transportation lift, one transportation and skiing lift and two beginner lifts. The proposed South Base and/or the Cheakamus Base will require parking for day skiers in addition to any accommodation development and will require a daylodge complete with all skier services required to stage skiers as they arrive in their cars. A second detachable chairlift (Lift V) is proposed for the Khyber area to the west of the (Lift U) Bagel Bowl chairlift. The Khyber lift has a vertical rise of approximately 635 metres, stretching from the Microwave Tower road to the ridge above Bagel Bowl at the 1,830-metre elevation. This lift will have a rated capacity of 2,400 pph, servicing terrain in the intermediate to expert skill classes. The Big Timber Gondola (Lift W) is the third staging lift from Creekside and is proposed to connect to the Westside expansion area. The top of this lift is located on a knoll just off the existing Dusty s Descent trail and provides easy access to all of the Westside lifts, including Lift T which provides access to the rest of the ski area. The Big Timber lift will primarily provide access to the ski area, but like most lower mountain access lifts at Whistler, also provides limited return cycle skiing on the existing Peak to Creek, Dusty s Descent, Big Timber and Home Run trails, as well as a couple of new trails and bypass sections of these trails. Lift Y, the Whistler South detachable six-passenger chairlift, forms the main access from the South Base to the Westside lifts and the rest of the mountain. This lift will also be used for return cycle skiing, but due to its elevation and exposure, the slopes may not be ideal for this purpose during periods of low snow or warmth. A Learning Centre containing a short fixed grip chairlift (Lift Z) and a moving carpet is proposed for the relatively flat terrain adjacent to the bottom of the Whistler South gondola. The terrain associated with this lift has relatively good exposures for snow holding, is easily accessible and suitable for advanced beginners and novice skiers. A gondola (Lift X) is proposed to connect the parking lots in the valley bottom with the South Base. The valley bottom parking lots near Function Junction and Cheakamus Crossing will initially be used as Park n Ride lots for day skiers from Vancouver, Squamish and Whistler South, and once demand warrants, this gondola will be installed to move skiers up to the Westside Lifts and the main ski area via the South Base. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-16 September 2013

120 Trails The Flute chair (Lift O) will require new trails to be cut below treeline and selected tree removal in the gladed zones. Some above treeline areas may also need limited fine grooming to provide an ideal skiing surface at the beginning of the season. New trails will also be cut on the Westside/Southside in the Khyber/Bagel Bowl zone and the Whistler South zone, as well as near the Big Timber Gondola for return skiing on that terrain. Glading will also take place in selected parts of the Bagel Bowl and Khyber terrain to open up the terrain to more skier use (this area is currently lightly used for skiing although it is not lift serviced). A ski trail will also be constructed from the South Base down to the valley base area. This trail will be constructed mostly as a skiway due to the shallow grades present, and will be used primarily as an egress trail when snow conditions allow. Mountain Restaurants The Raven s Nest restaurant will be replaced by a new restaurant located slightly farther to the west, closer to the edge of the steep slopes, thereby providing a spectacular view of the Whistler Valley at Creekside, the Callaghan Valley and all points west of Whistler Mountain. This new restaurant would contain approximately seats and could also be used for medium sized functions in the summer or evenings as it is directly accessible from the Creekside Gondola. A full service daylodge will be constructed in conjunction with the South Base including ticket sales, guest services, rentals, retail, etc. for skiers using this portal for staging in the morning. Due to the fact that Lift Y is anticipated to get limited use as a return cycle skiing lift and the fact that skiers at Whistler Blackcomb have a preponderance to eating lunch up on the mountain, the food service facility here will be limited to seats, enough to service skiers on the beginner lifts, morning arrivals and a small portion of skiers using Lift Y for return cycle skiing. It is anticipated that most skiers in the Westside/Southside would prefer to stay higher on the mountain and eat at one of the Bagel Bowl lift s restaurants. A small children s ski school facility will also be built here, either contained in the same building as the daylodge or in a stand-alone building closer to Lifts Z and the moving carpet. The day skier base in the valley near Function Junction/Cheakamus Crossing will contain parking lots, and all skiers using this lot will have to pass through the South Base, therefore, the only skier services planned for this base will be ticket sales. Restrooms will likely be included for the convenience of arriving or departing Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-17 September 2013

121 skiers. Skiers wanting any other services will simply walk into the South Base daylodge after getting off Lift X, which will be located in close proximity. Summary of Master Plan The conclusion of Phase 17 constitutes the buildout of Whistler Mountain under the 2010 Master Plan Update. At buildout, Whistler Mountain will have a total capacity of approximately 29,800 skiers per day, based on all lifts being open and available and experiencing lift lines on every lift on the mountain in the minute range. Also listed is the calculated SCC under two differing operational conditions: Mode 2, when the upper mountain is closed due to adverse weather conditions, and Mode 3, when the lower mountain has insufficient snow or undesirable snow conditions for skiing. Both modes can easily occur during peak periods in December. The Lift Development Schedule for the Phase 17 lifts is listed in Table V.2 and the alignments of the lifts are graphically illustrated on the Mountain Master Plan, Figure 14a. TABLE V.2 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN LIFT SPECIFICATIONS BUILDOUT Lift Number A B C D(R) E F(R) G H I Lift Name Lower Upper Creekside Harmony Big Red Emerald The Garbanzo Olympic Village Village Gondola Express Express Express Peak Express Gondola Gondola Lift Type D8G D8G D6G D6C D4C D6C D4C D4C Combi Top Elevation m. 1,020 1,834 1,297 2,107 1,847 1,839 2,175 1,675 1,139 Bottom Elevation m , ,582 1,295 1,415 1,774 1,018 1,025 Total Vertical m Horizontal Distance m. 1,480 3,340 1,920 1,612 2,390 1, , Slope Distance m. 1,519 3,438 2,050 1,706 2,495 1,833 1,073 2, Average Slope % 23% 24% 34% 33% 23% 24% 40% 33% 16% Operational Capacity 2,800 2,800 2,097 3,600 2,800 3,200 2,500 2,800 2,000 V.T.M./Hr.(000) 960 2,279 1,350 1,890 1,546 1,357 1,003 1, Rope Speed m/sec Trip Time min Operating Hr./Day V.T.M. Demand/Day 2,568 2,970 4,534 5,704 4,752 2,903 6,994 4,269 2,120 Loading Eff. % 95% 95% 95% 90% 95% 85% 95% 95% 90% Access Reduction 70% 43% 60% 10% 28% 16% 6% 15% 0% SCC Skiers/Day 750 2, ,750 1,560 2, , Mode 2-No Upper Mtn 750 2, ,560 2, , Mode 3-No Lower Mtn 2,890 1,750 1,560 2, , Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-18 September 2013

122 TABLE V.2 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN LIFT SPECIFICATIONS BUILDOUT Lift Number K(R) L M N Oa P Q Lift Name Franz's Orange Robertson's Symphony Flute Yellow Fitz- CLC CLC Express Gondola Express Peak Express simmons Carpet Handletow I Expres s Lift Type D4C D8G 4C D4C D6C D4C D4C-B MC HT Top Elevation m. 1,997 1,676 1,937 2,035 2,010 1,850 1,020 1,026 1,035 Bottom Elevation m. 1, ,527 1,527 1,527 1, ,024 1,026 Total Vertical m , Horizontal Distance m. 1,810 3,150 1,070 2,040 1,170 1,300 1, Slope Distance m. 1,857 3,312 1,146 2,158 1,266 1,359 1, Average Slope % 23% 32% 38% 25% 41% 30% 20% 6% 10% Operational Capacity 2,800 2,200 2,000 2,400 3,000 2,800 2,650 1, V.T.M./Hr.(000) 1,168 2, ,219 1,449 1, Rope Speed m/sec Trip Time min Operating Hr./Day V.T.M. Demand/Day 3,968 4,140 8,475 3,945 6,419 3,729 2,568 Loading Eff. % 90% 90% 80% 95% 85% 95% 95% Access Reduction 7% 60% 75% 8% 0% 0% 70% SCC Skiers/Day 1,600 1, ,610 1,150 1, Mode 2-No Upper Mtn 1,600 1,320 1, Mode 3-No Lower Mtn 1, ,610 1,150 1, Lift Number T Lift Name CLC Olympic Olympic Olympic Olympic Garbanzo Garbanzo Kadenwood Handletow II Carpet I Carpet II Carpet II Carpet II Beginner Beginner Beginner Zone Zone Zone Lift Type HT MC MC MC MC MC MC MC D4C Top Elevation m. 1,032 1,026 1,032 1,033 1,047 1,672 1, ,635 Bottom Elevation m. 1,023 1,023 1,026 1,026 1,024 1,667 1, ,035 Total Vertical m Horizontal Distance m ,400 Slope Distance m ,523 Average Slope % 10% 8% 10% 12% 14% 8% 33% 13% 43% Operational Capacity 374 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 2,800 V.T.M./Hr.(000) ,680 Rope Speed m/sec Trip Time min Operating Hr./Day V.T.M. Demand/Day 5,265 Loading Eff. % 90% Access Reduction 37% SCC Skiers/Day ,230 Mode 2-No Upper Mtn ,230 Mode 3-No Lower Mtn ,230 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-19 September 2013

123 TABLE V.2 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN LIFT SPECIFICATIONS BUILDOUT Lift Number U V W X Y Z Lift Name Bagel Upper Big Function Whistler Whistler Southside Kadenwood Bowl Khyber Timber Access South South Beginner Gondola Express Gondola Beginner Zone Lift Type D6C D4C D8G D8G D6C 4C MC TOTAL Pulse G Top Elevation m. 1,970 1,830 1,445 1,014 1,366 1,100 1, Bottom Elevation m. 1,365 1, ,013 1,013 1, Total Vertical m , Horizontal Distance m. 1,810 1,670 2,640 2,870 1, Slope Distance m. 1,908 1,787 2,756 2,899 1, , Average Slope % 33% 38% 30% 14% 31% 21% 8% 28% 26% Operational Capacity 3,200 2,400 2,400 2,800 3,200 1,800 1,500 73, V.T.M./Hr.(000) 1,936 1,524 1,901 1,148 1, , Rope Speed m/sec max. Trip Time min Operating Hr./Day V.T.M. Demand/Day 6,429 5,907 3,943 3,791 2,120 Loading Eff. % 85% 95% 95% 95% 85% 80% Access Reduction 34% 0% 50% 100% 60% 0% SCC Skiers/Day 1,140 1,590 1, ,730 Mode 2-No Upper Mtn 1,590 1, ,950 Mode 3-No Lower Mtn 1,140 1, ,340 As listed above, at build-out, the Whistler Mountain Master Plan would provide a calculated SCC of approximately 29,730, an increase of about 11,140 (or 65%) over the existing 17,990 skiers per day. There are also much wider variations in the SCC available in the 3 different modes, particularly on the days when the mountain top (high alpine) terrain is closed due to storm conditions. To accommodate these operating modes and to improve the skier s experience (shorter lines on busy days as one of the main goals) it is necessary to build more lift capacity than the proportional increase in forecasted peak day skier visits. To accomplish this goal, Whistler Mountain will aim to decrease the ratio of peak day skiers to calculated SCC from the existing 82-85% down to about 70-75%. This increase in Skier Carrying Capacity should make the skiing experience much more comfortable on those days when part of the mountain is closed or snow conditions are less than desirable in one or more areas. With the concurrent expansion of Blackcomb and the potential 35 percent increase in peak skier days on the two mountains combined to about 37,000, Whistler s share (60%) should be approximately 22,200 skiers on a peak day. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-20 September 2013

124 Table V.3 lists the ski trails developed at the conclusion of Phase 17 of the 2013 Master Plan. A total of 245 trails cover approximately 924 hectares and have a total combined daily capacity of approximately 23,885 skiers. TABLE V.3 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY BUILDOUT Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top Bottom Vertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift A - Lower Village Gondola Lower Olympic A1 2 1, ,070 2,097 16% 27% Mid Fantastic A % 31% Northern Lights/Lower Fan A ,010 1,028 19% 40% Upper Fantastic A4 3 1, ,730 1,755 17% 30% Crabapple partial B3 3 1, ,330 1,361 22% 35% Total Lift A 4 (not including B3) 5,189 (not including B3) , Lift B - Upper Village Gondola Upper Olympic 2/3 area B1 3 1,428 1, ,580 1,626 24% 32% Expressway B2 2 1,295 1, ,220 2,237 12% 27% Crabapple partial B3 3 1, ,330 1,361 22% 35% Bear Cub 1/3 area E17 2 1,592 1, ,540 1,557 15% 29% Upper Whiskey Jack 1/3 area F1 2 1,835 1, ,030 1,044 17% 29% Lower Whiskey Jack 1/3 area F3 3 1,661 1, ,090 1,117 22% 32% Upper Ego Bowl 1/3 area F6a 3 1,805 1, % 35% Lower Ego Bowl 1/3 area F6b 3 1,637 1, % 27% Ptarmigan Left 1/3 area H3 5 1,497 1, % 23% Ptarmigan 1/3 area H4 5 1,520 1, ,500 1,559 28% 48% Orange Peel/ Dave Murray 1/3 area H9 4 1,675 1, ,140 1,165 21% 39% Bear Paw 1/3 area H10 4 1,429 1, ,150 1,205 31% 43% Tokum 1/3 area H11 5 1,350 1, % 46% Upper Orange Peel 2/3 area E15 3 1,660 1, % 6% Mid Pony Trail 2/3 area E16 3 1,595 1, % 33% Total Lift B 3 (not including non "B" trails) 5,224 (not including non "B" trails) ,315 2,890 Lift C - Creekside Gondola Crossroads 2/3 area C1 4 1,270 1, % 18% Fallaway 2/3 area C2 6 1,225 1, % 55% Dave Murray Downhill 2/3 area C3 5 1, ,375 2,442 24% 46% /3 area C4 4 1, % 40% /3 area C5 4 1, % 38% Mid & Lower Franz's 1/3 & partial C7 4 1, ,250 2,345 29% 40% Total Lift C 6 6, Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-21 September 2013

125 TABLE V.3 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY BUILDOUT Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top Bottom Vertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift D - Harmony Express Upper Burnt Stew D1a 3 2,105 1, ,875 1,910 17% 32% Lower Burnt Stew D1b 3 1,748 1, ,630 1,634 7% 10% Crescendo D2 6 1,930 1, % 65% D3 6 1,810 1, % 2% Sun Bowl D4 7 2,085 1, ,190 1,243 30% 71% ½ dens. 1/2 area D5 7 1,936 1, % 103% ½ dens. Harvey's Harrow 1/2 area D6 7 1,915 1, % 96% ½ dens. Robertson's 1/2 area D7 7 1,925 1, % 89% ½ dens. The Glades D8 4 1,825 1, % 35% Harmony Ridge D9 4 2,033 1, ,160 2,206 21% 37% D9a 4 1,780 1, % 50% Gunbarrels D10 7 1,735 1, % 65% /4 dens Lower Boomer Bowl D11 7 1,685 1, % 58% /4 dens Boomer Bowl D12 6 1,875 1, % 65% Krummholz D13 6 1,887 1, % 60% Kaleidoscope D14 7 1,910 1, % 81% Low Roll D15 7 1,935 1, % 87% Upper McConkey's D16 7 1,991 1, % 84% Harmony Horseshoes Right D17 7 2,015 1, % 96% Harmony Horseshoes Left D18 7 2,025 1, % 88% Pika's Traverse D19 3 2,105 1, ,715 1,736 16% 34% Camel Humps D20 6 2,022 1, ,485 7,486 1% 52% Harmony Piste D21 4 1,960 1, ,370 1,397 20% 47% D21a 3 1,688 1, % 23% Lower McConkey's D22 6 1,770 1, % 65% Little Whistler D23 7 2,105 1, % 80% Mumbling Rocks D24 6 1,950 1, % 47% D25 5 1,880 1, % 39% Waterfall/Bitter End D26 6 1,810 1, % 64% Lift Line D27 7 1,727 1, % 70% Lower G.S. D28 5 1,690 1, % 49% G.S. D29 3 1,837 1, ,020 1,029 13% 24% Backbowl D30 6 1,915 1, % 52% Rabbit Tracks D31 5 1,855 1, % 42% Chunky's Choice D32 6 1,805 1, % 54% Dapper's Delight D33 7 1,730 1, % 87% D39 6 2,033 1, % 36% Total Lift D 37 30, ,575 1,750 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-22 September 2013

126 TABLE V.3 CONT. WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY - BUILDOUT Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top Bottom Vertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift E - Big Red Express E1 6 1,846 1, % 48% E2 3 1,846 1, % 32% E3 3 1,846 1, ,350 1,367 16% 39% E4 4 1,830 1, % 38% Roundhouse Roll E5 5 1,830 1, % 30% Pale Face E6 7 1,787 1, % 69% Porcupine 2/3 area E7 3 1,675 1, % 31% Fisheye 2/3 area E8 3 1,713 1, % 37% Little Red Run 2/3 area E9 3 1,716 1, % 39% Upper Franz's Creek 2/3 area E10 3 1,735 1, % 33% Old Man 2/3 area E11 3 1,740 1, % 36% Franz's Meadow 2/3 area E12 6 1,710 1, % 52% Papoose 2/3 area E13 3 1,662 1, % 20% Banana Peel 2/3 area E14 2 1,655 1, % 27% Upper Orange Peel 2/3 area E15 3 1,660 1, % 6% Mid Pony Trail 2/3 area E16 3 1,595 1, % 33% Bear Cub 2/3 area E17 2 1,592 1, ,540 1,557 15% 29% Lower Pony Trail 2/3 area E18 3 1,510 1, ,145 1,165 19% 30% Upper Insanity 2/3 area E19 7 1,469 1, % 69% Jimmy's Joker 2/3 area E20 6 1,578 1, % 52% Wild Card 2/3 area E21 6 1,585 1, % 50% Upper Franz's 2/3 area E22 5 1,590 1, % 43% Goat's Gully 2/3 area E23 7 1,490 1, % 70% Mid Dave Murray 2/3 area E25 4 1,433 1, % 45% Women's DH E26 6 1,465 1, % 32% Mid & Lower Franz's 1/3 & partial C7 4 1, ,250 2,345 29% 40% Doom & Gloom partial G10 6 1,924 1, % 59% ½ dens. partial G11 7 1,935 1, % 65% ½ dens. L. Whistler Bowl/Grande partial G12 6 1,953 1, ,245 1,307 32% 75% Upper Whistler Bowl partial G13 6 2,171 1, % 56% West Cirque partial G14 7 2,136 1, % 105% Christmas Trees partial G15 7 1,925 1, % 67% ½ dens. Sneaky Pete partial G16 7 1,935 1, % 65% Cockalorum/West Bowl 1/3 & partial G17 7 1,969 1, % 81% Bagel Bowl Right 1/3 & partial G18 7 1,950 1, % 94% Bagel Bowl Left 1/3 & partial G19 5 1,905 1, % 48% /3 & partial G20 6 1,891 1, % 63% Upper Peak to Creek partial G21 5 2,164 1, % 51% Highway 86 partial G22 5 1,683 1, ,720 1,736 14% 29% Total Lift E 25 (not including non "E" trails) 14,054 (not including non "E" trails) ,060 1,560 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-23 September 2013

127 TABLE V.3 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY BUILDOUT Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top Bottom Vertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift F - Emerald Express Upper Whiskey Jack 2/3 area F1 2 1,838 1, ,030 1,045 17% 29% Upper Enchanted Forest F2 3 1,661 1, % 43% Lower Whiskey Jack 2/3 area F3 3 1,661 1, ,090 1,117 22% 32% Pig Alley F4 2 1,649 1, % 8% Lower Enchanted Forest F5 3 1,620 1, % 35% Upper Ego Bowl 2/3 area F6a 3 1,805 1, % 35% Lower Ego Bowl (class 3) 1/3 area F6b 3 1,637 1, % 27% Lower Ego Bowl (class 2) 1/3 area F6b 2 1,637 1, % 27% F7 4 1,594 1, % 29% Cougar Trail F8 4 1,712 1, % 41% F9 4 1,745 1, % 42% Jolly Green Giant 2/3 area F10 3 1,838 1, ,035 1,061 23% 32% F11 5 1,646 1, % 37% Race Center F12 4 1,520 1, % 33% Lower Jolly Green Giant F13 3 1,537 1, % 35% F21 3 1,624 1, % 32% Old Crow F22 3 1,570 1, % 35% Lower Sidewinder F23 3 1,450 1, % 11% Total Lift F 17 (not including F6b Class 2) 8,422 (not including F6b Class 2) ,310 2,240 Lift G - The Peak The Saddle G1 5 2,088 1, ,275 1,313 25% 53% Mathews' Traverse G2 3 2,174 2, % 15% The Couloir G3 7 2,134 2, % 121% The Cirque G4 7 2,143 2, % 169% Last Chance G5 6 2,020 1, % 48% Surprise G6 7 2,016 1, % 69% G7 7 1,985 1, % 75% Shale Slope G8 7 1,953 1, % 75% Left Hook G9 7 1,905 1, % 71% Doom & Gloom partial G10 6 1,924 1, % 59% ½ dens. partial G11 7 1,935 1, % 65% ½ dens. L. Whistler Bowl/Grande F partial G12 6 1,953 1, ,245 1,307 32% 75% Upper Whistler Bowl partial G13 6 2,173 1, % 56% West Cirque partial G14 7 2,136 1, % 105% Christmas Trees partial G15 7 1,925 1, % 67% ½ dens. Sneaky Pete partial G16 7 1,935 1, % 65% Cockalorum/West Bowl 1/3 & partial G17 7 1,969 1, % 81% Bagel Bowl Right 1/3 & partial G18 7 1,950 1, % 94% Bagel Bowl Left 1/3 & partial G19 5 1,905 1, % 48% /3 & partial G20 6 1,891 1, % 63% Upper Peak to Creek partial G21 5 2,164 1, % 51% Highway 86 partial G22 5 1,683 1, ,720 1,736 14% 29% G23 6 2,060 1, % 45% Glacier Bowl G24 6 2,055 1, % 43% Total Lift G 24 16, , Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-24 September 2013

128 TABLE V.3 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY BUILDOUT Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top Bottom Vertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift H - Garbanzo Express Raven H1 5 1,674 1, % 50% Lower Raven H2 6 1,565 1, % 60% Ptarmigan Left 2/3 area H3 5 1,497 1, % 23% Ptarmigan 2/3 area H4 5 1,520 1, ,500 1,559 28% 48% Seppo's H5 6 1,674 1, ,165 1,223 32% 64% H6 5 1,195 1, % 38% H7 2 1,674 1, % 9% CNC Training Center 1/2 area H8 3 1,660 1, % 32% Orange Peel/ Dave Murray 1/3 area H9 4 1,674 1, ,140 1,165 21% 39% Bear Paw 2/3 area H10 4 1,429 1, ,150 1,205 31% 43% Tokum 2/3 area H11 5 1,350 1, % 46% In Deep H12 6 1,295 1, % 51% /4 dens Unsanctioned H13 6 1,350 1, % 57% /4 dens Side Order H14 6 1,552 1, % 46% /4 dens Club 21 H15 6 1,445 1, % 44% /4 dens H16 4 1,073 1, % 24% H17 5 1,320 1, % 49% Upper Olympic 1/3 area B1 3 1,428 1, ,580 1,626 24% 32% Total Lift H 17 (not including B1) 10,246 (not including B1) ,140 2,350 Lift I - Olympic Chair I1 2 1,138 1, % 17% I2 2 1,138 1, % 20% Total Lift I 2 1, Lift K - Franz's Chair Porcupine 1/3 area E7 3 1,675 1, % 31% Fisheye 1/3 area E8 3 1,713 1, % 37% Little Red Run 1/3 area E9 3 1,716 1, % 39% Upper Franz's Creek 1/3 area E10 3 1,735 1, % 33% Old Man 1/3 area E11 3 1,740 1, % 36% Franz's Meadow 1/3 area E12 6 1,710 1, % 52% J1 3 1,995 1, % 41% J2 3 1,900 1, % 32% Ridge Run J3 6 1,963 1, % 50% J4 6 1,928 1, % 58% J5 7 1,956 1, % 90% J6 6 1,980 1, % 56% D40 6 2,015 1, % 60% /4 dens Peak Chair-Little Red Traverse 3 1,780 1, % 8% Peak Chair-Franz's Meadow Traverse 3 1,775 1, % 9% Total Lift K 9 (not including partial trails) 4,527 (not including partial trails) ,600 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-25 September 2013

129 TABLE V.3 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY - BUILDOUT Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top Bottom Vertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift L - Orange Gondola Crossroads 1/3 area C1 4 1,270 1, % 18% Fallaway 1/3 area C2 6 1,225 1, % 55% Dave Murray Downhill 1/3 area C3 5 1, ,375 2,442 24% 46% /3 area C4 4 1, % 40% /3 area C5 4 1, % 38% Mid & Lower Franz's 2/3 area C7 4 1, ,250 2,345 29% 40% CNC Training Center 1/2 area H8 3 1,660 1, % 32% Orange Peel/ Dave Murray 1/3 area H9 4 1,674 1, ,140 1,165 21% 39% Papoose 1/3 area E13 3 1,662 1, % 20% Banana Peel 1/3 area E14 2 1,655 1, % 27% Lower Pony Trail 1/3 area E18 3 1,510 1, ,145 1,165 19% 30% Upper Insanity 1/3 area E19 7 1,469 1, % 69% Jimmy's Joker 1/3 area E20 6 1,578 1, % 52% Wild Card 1/3 area E21 6 1,585 1, % 50% Upper Franz's 1/3 area E22 5 1,590 1, % 43% Goat's Gully 1/3 area E23 7 1,490 1, % 70% Weasel E24 6 1,330 1, % 51% Mid Dave Murray 1/3 area E25 4 1,433 1, % 45% Total Lift L 1 (not including partial trails) 376 (not including partial trails) ,320 Lift M 1/2 area D5 7 1,936 1, % 103% ½ dens. Harvey's Harrow 1/2 area D6 7 1,915 1, % 96% ½ dens. Robertson's 1/2 area D7 7 1,925 1, % 89% ½ dens. Total Lift M 0 (not including partial trails) 0 (not including partial trails) Lift N - Symphony Express Jeff's Ode to Joy N1 3 2,030 1, ,370 2,423 21% 40% Upper Adiago N2 4 1,910 1, ,255 1,287 23% 43% Lower Adiago N3 3 1,632 1, % 29% Glissando N4 4 1,667 1, % 26% open bowl N5 6 1,896 1, % 54% ½ dens. Rhapsody Bowl Left open bowl N6 7 1,934 1, % 75% ½ dens. Rhapsody Bowl Right open bowl N7 5 2,018 1, ,040 1,080 28% 47% ½ dens. Total Lift N 7 8, ,295 1,610 Lift O O1 6 1,753 1, % 60% O2 5 1,838 1, ,420 1,453 22% 48% open bowl O3 5 1,795 1, % 48% ½ dens. O4 5 1,742 1, % 35% O5 5 2,010 1, ,110 2,143 18% 50% open bowl O6 5 1,857 1, ,000 1,023 22% 48% ½ dens. O7 7 1,909 1, % 81% O8 6 1,935 1, % 57% O9 7 1,906 1, % 69% O10 6 1,935 1, % 63% O11 7 2,000 1, % 94% O12 7 2,001 1, % 81% O13 7 2,000 1, % 77% O14 7 1,995 1, % 80% O15 6 2,009 1, % 57% Total Lift O O16 4 2,010 1, ,415 1,447 21% 42% , ,220 1,150 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-26 September 2013

130 TABLE V.3 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY - BUILDOUT Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top Bottom Vertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift P P1 4 1,729 1, % 40% P2 3 1,649 1, % 36% P3 3 1,596 1, % 31% P4 3 1,691 1, % 36% P5 6 1,725 1, % 46% Jolly Green Giant 1/3 area F10 3 1,838 1, ,035 1,061 23% 32% Chipmunk Terrain Park F14 4 1,650 1, % 29% F15 3 1,655 1, % 13% Bobcat F16 3 1,603 1, % 37% Coyote F17 4 1,560 1, % 41% Green Acres Left F18 4 1,738 1, % 41% F19 5 1,740 1, % 45% F20 3 1,845 1, % 40% F24 3 1,555 1, % 39% glades D34 7 1,781 1, % 71% ½ dens. Ratfink Right glades D35 7 1,777 1, % 79% ½ dens. Ratfink D36 6 1,835 1, % 58% glades D37 6 1,805 1, % 53% ½ dens. Marmot D38 3 1,730 1, ,280 1,289 12% 17% Total Lift P 18 (not including partial trails) 9,312 (not including partial trails) ,365 1,900 Lift Q - Fitzsimmons Express See Lift A Trails Total Lift Q Lift T T1 4 1,617 1, % 26% T2 5 1,493 1, ,680 1,742 27% 50% T3 6 1,345 1, % 63% T4 6 1,631 1, ,670 1,774 36% 58% T5 6 1,631 1, ,415 1,512 38% 55% T6 6 1,455 1, % 47% T7 6 1,361 1, % 21% T8 4 1,166 1, % 30% Total Lift T 8 7, ,230 Lift U U1 5 1,968 1, ,590 1,615 18% 45% U2 6 1,595 1, % 55% U3 7 1,725 1, ,045 1,105 34% 65% U4 6 1,825 1, ,480 1,544 30% 65% U5 5 1,770 1, ,330 1,377 27% 47% U6 5 1,698 1, ,400 1,439 24% 48% Cockalorum/West Bowl 2/3 area G17 7 1,969 1, % 81% Bagel Bowl Right 2/3 area G18 7 1,950 1, % 94% Bagel Bowl Left 2/3 area G19 5 1,905 1, % 48% /3 area G20 6 1,891 1, % 63% Total Lift U 6 (not including partial trails) 7,864 (not including partial trails) ,195 1,140 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-27 September 2013

131 TABLE V.3 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY - BUILDOUT Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top Bottom Vertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Lift V V1 5 1,828 1, ,955 2,055 32% 50% V3 6 1,805 1, ,060 1,106 30% 55% V3 7 1,545 1, ,040 34% 71% V4 6 1,785 1, ,540 1,647 38% 60% V5 6 1,820 1, ,490 1,580 35% 58% V6 6 1,640 1, % 53% V7 6 1,404 1, % 30% Total Lift V 7 8, ,590 Lift W W1 4 1, ,785 2,893 28% 44% W2 6 1, ,430 1,489 29% 54% W3 3 1, ,790 2,852 21% 40% Dusty's Descent G26 5 1,385 1, % 43% G27 6 1, % 37% Home Run G28 6 1, % 42% Total Lift W 6 9, ,240 1,600 Lift X Southside Ski-out 3 1, ,680 3,703 11% 40% Total Lift X 1 3, Lift Y Y1 5 1,365 1, % 50% Y2 3 1,367 1, ,525 1,566 23% 38% Y3 3 1,197 1, % 34% Y4 5 1,187 1, % 50% Y5 6 1,305 1, % 58% Y6 6 1,341 1, % 52% Total Lift Y 6 5, Lift Z Z1 2 1,098 1, % 30% Z2 2 1,098 1, % 26% Total Lift Z Olympic Beginner Zone CLC Carpet 1 1,026 1, % 7% CLC Handletow I 1 1,035 1, % 9% CLC Handletow II 1 1,032 1, % 9% CLC Backyard Walk-up zone Olympic Carpet I 1 1,026 1, % 8% Olympic Carpet II 1 1,032 1, % 10% Olympic Carpet III 1 1,033 1, % 12% Olympic Carpet IV 1 1,047 1, % 14% Total Beginner Zone Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-28 September 2013

132 TABLE V.3 CONT D WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL INVENTORY - BUILDOUT Elevation Total Horz. Slope Percent Slope Avg. Horz. Slope Skiers At Area Trail Trail Skill Top Bottom Vertical Dist. Dist. Width Area Area Lift at Name No. Class Meters Meters Meters Meters Meters Avg. Steep. Meters Ha. Ha. Density Total Area Garbanzo Beginner Zone Walk-up zone 1 1,676 1, % 7% Short Carpet 1 1,672 1, % 7% Long Carpet 1 1,676 1, % 12% Total Beginner Zone Southside Beginner Zone 1 1,025 1, % 7% Total Beginner Zone Kadenwood Beginner Zone % 12% Total Beginner Zone Other Trails Upper Sidewinder 1 3 1,595 1, ,380 1,387 10% 9% Roundhouse-Peak Skiway 2 3 1,830 1, % 13% Saddle-Burnt Stew 3 3 2,085 2, % 21% Harmony-Saddle 5 2,105 2, % 8% skiway T2-W 6 5 1,465 1, % 14% skiway from T 7 4 1, % 12% skiway from T 8 4 1, % 38% Skiway W-U 9 5 1,445 1, % 20% ,985 1, % 27% Total Other Trails 9 3, Total All Lifts km Ha 23,885 29,730 The Phase 17 ski trail balance, as listed in Table V.4 and illustrated in Plate V.1, indicates that Whistler Mountain will have excesses of low intermediate and expert terrain, quite similar to the existing balance, which has been quite successful over the years, supplemented by Blackcomb s amount of intermediate and high intermediate terrain. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-29 September 2013

133 TABLE V.4 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN CUMULATIVE SKI TRAIL BALANCE STATEMENT BUILDOUT Skill Classification Hectares Skiers Balance Ideal 1 Beginner % 5% 2 Novice , % 10% 3 Low Intermediate , % 20% 4 Intermediate , % 30% 5 High Intermediate , % 20% 6 Advanced , % 10% 7 Expert , % 5% TOTALS , % 100% Average Density = 32.2 Skiers/Hectare Optimum Density = 32.6 Skiers/Hectare Weighted Demand = 4,586 VTM/Skier/Day WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKI TRAIL BALANCE - BUILDOUT 35% 30% 25% Percent of Total Skiers 20% 15% 10% 5% 0% Beginner Novice Low Intermediate Intermediate High Intermediate Advanced Expert PLATE V.1 Master Plan Ideal Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-30 September 2013

134 Table V.5 summarizes the Whistler Mountain Trail Balance by Lift System and Plate V.2 graphically illustrates the Lift vs. Trail Capacity. A number of ski pods appear to be slightly over lifted; however, this will reduce line-ups on peak days and provide a higher quality experience for the skier. TABLE V.5 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN TRAIL BALANCE BY LIFT SYSTEM Lift No. A & Q B C D(R) E F(R) G H I K(R) Lift Name Gondola & Upper Creekside Harmony Big Red Emerald The Garbanzo Olympic Franz's Fitzsimmons Village Gondola Express Express Express Peak Express Express Lift Type D10G/D4C-B D8G D6G D6C D4C D6C D4C D4C Combi D4C Lift Capacity 1,460 2, ,750 1,560 2, , ,600 Skiers/Day Trail Capacity 1,125 1, ,575 2,060 1,310 1,285 1, Skiers/Day Trails:Lifts 77% 46% 54% 147% 132% 58% 167% 49% 50% 51% Average Density Skiers/Hectare Optimum Density Skiers/Hectare Demand VTM 2,568 2,970 4,534 5,704 4,752 2,903 6,994 4,269 2,120 3,968 VTM/Skier/Day Balance Beginner 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% Novice 36% 27% 0% 0% 7% 18% 0% 4% 100% 0% Low Intermediate 64% 52% 0% 17% 31% 64% 2% 17% 0% 66% Intermediate 0% 11% 44% 21% 17% 17% 0% 30% 0% 0% High Intermediate 0% 10% 52% 7% 8% 2% 18% 39% 0% 0% Advanced 0% 0% 3% 23% 18% 0% 30% 10% 0% 30% Expert 0% 0% 0% 32% 19% 0% 50% 0% 0% 4% Total 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% Lift No. L M N Oa P T U V W Y Z Lift Name Orange Robertson's Symphony Flute Yellow Bagel Upper Big Whistler Whistler Gondola Express Peak Express Bowl Khyber Timber South South Lift Type D8G 4C D4C D6C D4C D4C D6C D4C D8G D6C 4C Lift Capacity 1, ,610 1,150 1,900 1,230 1,140 1,590 1, Skiers/Day Trail Capacity ,295 2,220 1, , , Skiers/Day Trails:Lifts 68% 88% 80% 193% 72% 54% 105% 49% 78% 92% 45% Average Density Skiers/Hectare Optimum Density Skiers/Hectare Demand VTM 4,140 8,475 3,945 6,419 3,729 5,265 6,429 5,907 3,943 3,791 2,120 VTM/Skier/Day Balance Beginner 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% Novice 2% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 100% Low Intermediate 13% 0% 49% 0% 45% 0% 0% 0% 33% 62% 0% Intermediate 55% 0% 19% 11% 36% 17% 0% 0% 40% 0% 0% High Intermediate 21% 0% 23% 37% 12% 35% 44% 38% 12% 26% 0% Advanced 4% 0% 5% 12% 5% 48% 21% 51% 15% 12% 0% Expert 3% 100% 5% 41% 2% 0% 34% 12% 0% 0% 0% Total 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-31 September 2013

135 LIFT VS. TRAIL CAPACITY 3,000 2,890 2,575 Lift Capacity Trail Capacity 2,500 2,060 2,240 2,350 Skiers Per Day 2,000 1,500 1,460 1,125 1,315 1,750 1,560 1, ,295 1,140 1,600 1, ,000 Lift Capacity Trail Capacity 2,500 2,220 Skiers Per Day 2,000 1,500 1,320 1,610 1,295 1,150 1,900 1,365 1,230 1, ,140 1, ,590 1,600 1, PLATE V.2 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-32 September 2013

136 .6 Snowmaking Ski areas are generally considered to be feasible if there is at least a 90 percent probability of a 60 to 75 cm snowpack by December 15. It is important that a ski area as large as Whistler Mountain, with its associated destination tourist facilities, have a reliable, guaranteed snowpack early in December. Snowmaking below 1,600 metres elevation on the west side and 1,325 metres on the north side of Whistler Mountain will help to ensure that early December and late April skiing to the valley will be possible. Snowmaking on the upper mountain ensures that there is a skiable snowpack present during low snow periods like those experienced up to Christmas (& beyond in 2008/09) and during several of the last few years. The Inventory section details the existing snowmaking system, including the 117 hectares currently covered by snowmaking. In the future, Whistler proposes to expand the snowmaking system significantly to increase the number of below tree line runs covered to provide more skiable terrain in those times of low snowpack. Routes currently anticipated to require snowmaking coverage in the future are shown on the proposed snowmaking map (Figure 15). As illustrated, the proposed snowmaking system would cover approximately 295 hectares; an increase of about 178 hectares (152%) over the existing system. In times of extremely low snowpack, skiing would be possible on most of the lower mountain and one or two runs on each of the lifts below the alpine. Snowmaking would also be provided on key connector trails such as Pika s Traverse. TABLE V.6 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SNOWMAKING SUMMARY Snowmaking Coverage Hectares Acres Current Proposed Increase Percent Increase 152% Collectively, the two mountains hold water licenses to withdraw up to million cubic metres per year from 11 creeks within the CRA. Whistler Mountain s existing licenses total million cubic metres per year (1,121 million US gallons or 5,270 acre-feet) from seven creeks. Additionally approximately half of Blackcomb s license for Fitzsimmons Creek is available for use with Whistler Mountain s snowmaking system, meaning that Whistler Mountain has access to Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-33 September 2013

137 approximately 7.2 million m ³/year as shown in Table V.7. The current annual water usage ranges from 265,000 m ³ (70 million US gallons) to 568,000 m ³ (150 million US gallons) depending on the season. Therefore, there is more than enough capacity within the existing water licenses to handle the proposed 152% increase in snowmaking coverage. TABLE V.7 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SNOWMAKING CAPACITY SUMMARY Water Licenses Thousand Million m³/year USG/year Approved Annual Amount 4,247 1,717 Diverted from Blackcomb 2, Available for Whistler 7,242 1,193 Current Use 265 to to 150 Percent of License Used 8% 8% Excess Capacity Available 6,674 1,763 As the system expands, more pump stations, compressor buildings, valve stations, water intakes, etc. will be needed. The exact size and location of these facilities will be determined during detailed design of the snowmaking system. As part of this expansion, the existing snowmaking reservoirs may need to be reconfigured to accommodate larger water capacities. A third reservoir will be needed in the Westside/Southside area. Two potential sites have been indicated on the plan, however, neither of these sites have been confirmed in the field. As unforeseen circumstances arise, such as market changes, operational changes and climate change, it may be also be necessary to install snowmaking on trails not detailed on the included map to ensure optimal operations and guest satisfaction..7 On-Mountain Buildings Design Day To assist in the planning of skier service facilities, the number of skiers/boarders (the Skier Carrying Capacity/SCC) that would be skiing on the mountain on a Design Day needs to be determined. The design day is chosen to represent the average business levels expected during the high season. This is not the Peak Day experienced during the season since if facilities were designed for the peak day, they would be under-utilized for the balance of the season. For Whistler Blackcomb, Design Day has been selected as the average of the top fifteen skier visit days of the ski season, which means that level of visits can be expected to be exceeded just 8 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-34 September 2013

138 to 10 times per year. On days when the skier visits exceed the Design Day, the facilities will feel somewhat crowded or stressed. If this only happens during the busiest holiday periods such as Christmas or President s Week when skiers and guests expect facilities to be full, it will be tolerated. If however, the crowding occurs on typical weekends during the peak winter seasons, then people become annoyed and may not return. With current patterns of visitation, the average of the top fifteen busiest days is approximately equal to 80% of the skier visits on the peak day. If annual visit levels increase from 2.1 million skier visits to 2.8 million skier visits and peak day visits increase accordingly, then the two mountains combined could see peak days in the range of 37,000 skiers per day at buildout. Based on the available lift and terrain capacity on each mountain at build out and the future staging lifts proposed for each mountain, we project that about 22,200 (60%) of these skiers would be skiing on Whistler Mountain and 14,800 skiers would be on Blackcomb Mountain. Assuming the same relationship of 80% of expected peak day, the Design Day for Whistler Mountain would be approximately 17,760 skiers at buildout. For food service seating Whistler Blackcomb s goal is to provide food service seats for 70-75% of the anticipated peak day skiers. This target is at the upper end of the 65 to 75% range generally recommended for most ski areas and should provide skiers at Whistler Blackcomb with a high level of service. Skier Service Buildings/Restaurants A significant element in ensuring a positive skier experience is the placement and sizing of restaurants in convenient and logical locations throughout the mountain. As previously discussed, with the addition of new lifts there will be an associated requirement for new restaurant facilities and/or the upgrading of existing facilities to provide adequate service for skiers. Anticipated sizes and locations of the mountain restaurants by phase were described in the general description of each development phase and are summarized below. As mentioned in the Inventory section of this report, Whistler Mountain currently operates 2,534 indoor seats and 1,184 outdoor seats for food service seating, including 1,928 indoor seats on-mountain and 690 outdoor seats onmountain, with a significant shortage of on-mountain seats. Other than the three proposed new staging lifts, all future lift and trail development will be limited to the upper mountain, therefore it is anticipated that the vast majority of the additional skiers will be skiing on the upper mountain and a significant increase in upper mountain restaurant seats is required. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-35 September 2013

139 Several new food service facilities are proposed for the Whistler Mountain skiing complex, ranging in size from about 50 seats to 500 seats. These facilities will include restrooms and may also include space for guest services, ski school, ski rental (for exchanging gear), accessory retail, ski patrol or employee facilities depending on the location. In both planning and implementation, the general goal is to locate mountain restaurants in close proximity to the terrain that skiers are skiing so that they do not have to spend a large part of their ski day travelling back and forth to the warming and lunch facilities. Careful restaurant site location can result in less traffic on selected lifts and trails during the pre-lunch and post-lunch periods, as well as better utilization of the more remote skiing zones since skiers are less likely to come back to these areas after lunch if it is a long distance from their lunch spot. The proposed restaurant sites are shown graphically in Figure 14a and described briefly below. A range of sizes has been suggested for many of the sites, the actual number of seats will be determined at the design stage. If some of the restaurants are built at the larger end of the range, all of the sites may not be needed. The Symphony Bowl/Flute Peak area is fairly remote from the rest of the existing ski area and therefore if food service and warming facilities were provided, skiers would be encouraged to stay longer in this general zone. The saddle between Piccolo and Flute peaks has spectacular vistas and is more protected from the weather than the peaks. This would be an ideal site for a small food service facility of 100 to 150 indoor seats with a moderate size deck for outdoor seating. As described in a later section, this facility is also proposed to have a small lodge component, with several beds for overnight accommodation. A small (50+) seat warming facility (with restrooms) located at the bottom of Symphony Bowl and equipped with vending machines or limited food service is also proposed for this zone. The small Harmony Tea House at the top of the Harmony lift will be replaced by a small mountain restaurant on the small peak just east of the existing hut. The new facility will be similar in size to the Crystal hut on Blackcomb (100 to 150 seats) and have spectacular views in all directions. The Tea House will be turned over to ski patrol use to provide a base for rescue on much of the upper mountain. A larger restaurant is proposed close to the bottom of the Harmony chair where there is room to provide a full food service facility for most of the Harmony zone and much of the Symphony/Flute zone, due to the smaller facilities planned there. There should be a big demand in this area as the combined SCC of Flute, Symphony, and Harmony is almost 5,000 skiers per day. A facility of 400 to 500 indoor seats may eventually be required in this location, however, it could be built in two phases, perhaps 250+ seats first and the balance provided at a later date. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-36 September 2013

140 A small restaurant is proposed at the top of the Peak chair. This location has been identified in the Whistler Mountain plans for many years and still remains an exceptional location for a restaurant at the top that would be popular for both summer sightseers and winter skiers. The views are fantastic with Black Tusk in the foreground and the ability to see as far as Howe Sound on clear days. A facility of approximately 100 to 150 indoor seats is proposed. This site is also been considered for a small on mountain lodging component. The Olympic Meadows area has limited food services yet there is a large number of skiers based in this area including return cycle skiing (on the Village Gondola, Garbanzo and Fitzsimmons), beginner skiers in the Olympic zone and youth racers training in the Dave Murray Training Centre. Although children under twelve in ski school eat at the Children s Learning Centre (CLC), other skiers in this zone must move to the top or bottom of the gondola to get food. A new facility could be located adjacent to or on top of the existing gondola building and would likely need 150 to 250 indoor seats. A new food service facility with approximately 400 to 500 indoor seats is proposed for the top of the new Orange Gondola. This facility will be located near the existing fuel depot, with views to the south, including towards Whistler Peak. The restaurant would be directly accessible from Creekside by gondola for both skiers and pedestrians, making it ideal for holding dinners and functions of a smaller scale than those held at the Roundhouse. The building should have a sizeable deck area and could provide some indoor space for accessory retail, rental exchange, ski school/guest services, etc. To support the creation of the new Learning Centre adjacent to the top of the Garbanzo lift, restrooms, warming space and a ski school lunch space are also required. These uses could be located in the existing Whistler Mountain Ski Club (WMSC) building and/or the proposed Orange Gondola restaurant. If the existing WMSC cabin is used for this purpose, Whistler would construct replacement space for WMSC in the area. The cabin could then either be expanded to accommodate all the space needed for lunches, or used for restrooms and warming, with the lunch space provided within the Orange restaurant. The children s lunch area should contain approximately 75 to100 seats and a small kitchen. The existing Raven s Nest restaurant at mid station occupies what once was an old house at the top of the original Whistler gondola. With only 65 indoor seats, this facility is undersized for the area. A new facility containing approximately 300 to 400 indoor seats and a large deck area containing approximately 150 seats is proposed to replace the existing building. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-37 September 2013

141 Dusty s Bar and Café at Creekside currently contain 69% of the Whistler Mountain indoor restaurant seats in the valley. An additional 90 seats in the Whistler Kid s facility are used to feed children in ski school. In addition, there are other food and beverage facilities located in the commercial space at Creekside that are close enough to the lifts for skiers to use at lunch. No increase in food service space operated by Whistler Blackcomb is anticipated in the Creekside area. The Westside expansion accommodates a significant number of skiers in a new zone that will require its own mountain restaurants. A small seat mountain restaurant is proposed for the top of the proposed Bagel Bowl lift and a larger seat facility is proposed for the bottom of the Bagel Bowl lift to capture and keep Westside skiers on this part of the mountain. The South Base will also contain a food service facility in its daylodge, containing about seats, space for Children s ski school and staging facilities for day skiers such as ticket sales and equipment rentals. In summary, many sites have been identified for food service and other skier service facilities, both on-mountain and in the base. To ensure a high level of service even during peak holiday periods, it is Whistler Blackcomb s goal to provide food service seats for 70-75% of the anticipated peak day skiers. This target is at the upper end of the 65 to 75% range generally recommended for most ski areas. Assuming a peak day of about 22,200 skiers and assuming an average of 3 turns per seat during the lunch time rush, approximately 5,550 seats are required (more than double the existing 2,534 indoor seats). The locations and size ranges described above will provide sufficient additional seats to meet this target. The exact size and location of each food service facility (whether new or expanded) however, will be determined at the detailed planning stage, immediately in advance of construction. The goal will be to provide sufficient food service seats to meet guest requirements and to create new and unique dining experiences on the mountain. Overall Skier Service Floorspace As described in the Inventory Section of this report, the skier service facilities needed at a ski resort can be separated into 12 functions grouped into three categories; Staging Facilities which skiers need as they arrive at the ski area prior to starting skiing, Commercial Facilities which are needed throughout the day and Operational Facilities which support the operation. To estimate the overall skier service floorspace recommended for Whistler Mountain at buildout, Ecosign has adjusted our resort standards to capture Whistler Blackcomb s service goals and applied them to the anticipated Design Day at Buildout of 17,760 skiers. As shown in Table V.8, the total recommended functional space at buildout for Whistler Mountain is approximately 21,120 square metres. Given the existing skier floorspace Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-38 September 2013

142 and its allocations, approximately 8,230 square metres of new skier service floorspace is required, which when making an allowance for space for circulation, mechanical and electrical equipment and storage, translates into a need for approximately 10,285 m² of new built space. In a resort with significant commercial space surrounding the valley staging lifts, other businesses could provide some of the staging requirements such as equipment rentals or the resort operator could lease commercial space for skier services instead of construction new buildings. New staging facilities will be required at Creekside to service the additional skiers staging through this portal once the Orange or Big Timber gondolas are constructed. It is expected this space will be provided within the existing commercial buildings at Creekside. Increases in the proportion of these services that are pre booked (seasons passes, tickets, ski school, rentals) could reduce the amount of floorspace needed at the lift base, while an increased proportion of skiers arriving by transit may increase the demand for public locker space. Detailed requirements will be developed when the lifts are planned to go in. The South Base will have a daylodge that will provide staging facilities for those skiers originating from the parking or accommodation located at this base. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-39 September 2013

143 TABLE V.8 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SKIER SERVICE FLOORSPACE PROGRAMMING DESIGN DAY = 17,760 SKIERS Modified Recommended Existing New Resort Total Floor Floor Area Floor space Space Standards Space Needed m²/skier m² m² m² Staging Facilities Ticket Sales Public Lockers , ,428 Equipment Rental & Repair ,650 1, Guest Services / Ski School Children's Programs/Daycare Sub-total Staging ,527 2,795 2,732 Commercial Facilities Food & Beverage Seating ,660 3,619 3,041 Kitchen & Scramble ,094 1,452 1,642 Rest Rooms , Accessory Retail ,237 1, Sub-total Commercial ,538 7,457 5,081 Operational Facilities Administration ,650 1, Employee Facilities ,439 n.a. First Aid & Ski Patrol Sub Total Operational ,052 3, Total Functional Space ,118 13,504 8,228 Storage , Mechanical/Circulation/Walls/Waste ,168 1,582 1,234 Total Skier Service Space ,397 16,005 10,285 Operations and Other Buildings In addition to skier service buildings and buildings associated with lifts, a ski area needs many other buildings for operations. These include, but are not limited to maintenance shop, lift maintenance, snowmaking operations (pumphouse, compressors, valve houses, hose drying space, etc.), storage, race course support (start shacks, timing, etc), patrol huts, outdoor adventure tourism centres, etc. As mentioned previously, the Whistler fuel depot will be moved from its current position to the flats just below Pig Alley. This will be expanded over time to accommodate the future needs as the ski area expands. As terrain expands and the skiable area increases, the maintenance shop will need to be expanded to accommodate the larger operations and maintenance group (not only maintaining grooming machines, but also snowmobiles, wood shop, parts room, metal shop, sign Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-40 September 2013

144 shop, building maintenance, etc.). Due to lack of space at the current site, a second site will be required to accommodate the necessary expansion. Mountain operations has identified a site known as the Red Chair flats, near the bottom of Banana Peel, that is large enough to accommodate a satellite facility or a full service shop. This site is centrally located and will allow access to the new Westside area. There is also sufficient land to provide a road accessible maintenance facility at the South base. Alpine Maintenance Shop As mentioned previously, buildings associated with snowmaking expansion will be designed and located when detailed design of snowmaking systems are performed. These will likely be located adjacent to the existing or proposed snowmaking coverage as shown in the Proposed Snowmaking Map (Figure 15). Small buildings for grip maintenance are proposed adjacent to either the top or bottom terminal of the detachable lifts. These on-site grip maintenance sheds allow the mandatory grip maintenance to be carried out on an ongoing basis throughout the ski season, as opposed to having the chairs moved off-site for grip maintenance in the off season. The smaller buildings are both permanent and temporary in nature and are typically located, designed and built as the need arises (and the need is not always foreseen). Ticket sales, storage, employee facilities, etc., for adventure tourism Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-41 September 2013

145 activities will also be needed as Whistler accepts proposals for those types of activities to be located within their CRA. Mountain Lodges In the backcountry surrounding Whistler Blackcomb, there are several small alpine cabins with sleeping spaces allowing hikers and backcountry skiers to spend one or several nights while enjoying the outdoors. Blackcomb would like to create a small mountain lodge for their guests within their CRA. This type of facility would enable Whistler Blackcomb to offer skiers who don t have backcountry skills the unique experience of staying in a secluded high alpine back country lodge. It is anticipated that this facility will contain a small restaurant kitchen for morning breakfast, lunch during the day and evening dining, as well as 35 to 50 indoor seats for day use to compliment the accommodation facilities. The food service facilities could be used by ski area guests, backcountry skiers beginning or finishing the Spearhead Traverse or by sight seeing guests who would be brought to the facility by snowcat. Whistler Blackcomb has identified two potential sites for a small mountain lodge in the Symphony Bowl Area. The first site is on the saddle between Piccolo peak and Flute peak to provide food services during the day and limited sleeping facilities at night. This site is somewhat secluded and provides dramatic panoramic views in almost every direction. The second site is nestled in the trees just below the flat area at the bottom of Flute Bowl. The small proposed mountain restaurant at the top of the Peak Chair would also be a spectacular location to provide some on mountain lodging..8 Controlled Recreation Boundary (CRA) The existing Controlled Recreation Boundary (CRA), is shown graphically on most of the Master Plan maps including the Existing Area Map and the Mountain Master Plan Map. The current CRA boundary is based on several amendments and clarifications to the CRA made over a number of years. There are no anticipated adjustments needed to the CRA to allow Whistler Mountain to accomplish its recreational and business goals, as outlined in the 2013 Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update..9 Other On-Mountain Activities Although alpine skiing/snowboarding is the chief form of recreation offered on Whistler Mountain, many other on-mountain activities are now offered to Whistler s visitors during both the summer and winter seasons. One factor which has Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-42 September 2013

146 contributed to Whistler s success is the variety of activities that are available for resort visitors and local residents. Supplemental activities in winter have increased the attractiveness of Whistler to visitors who are not necessarily hard-core skiers and snowboarders. Winter Recreation Non-skiing guests and those who wish to spend only a portion of their winter vacation skiing or snowboarding, have many other activity options during the day and evening. Many of these activities occur in the village and on the valley floor, however, several activities take place on the mountain to allow non skiing visitors to enjoy the alpine experience. The success of Vail s Adventure Ridge, mountain-top dining in the evening, and snow tubing now provided at many areas across North America help illustrate the desire of guests for more varied activities. Expansion of the existing alternative recreational activities and the addition of new activities will help to provide guests with a well rounded winter recreation experience. Alternative on-mountain winter activities at Whistler Mountain include snowshoeing and dog sledding, and in the past have included ice skating, crosscountry skiing, etc. Whistler may choose to offer more of these activities in the future. Dining and sightseeing are also currently offered for non-skiers, with the possibility of using both mountains with the installation of the PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola in December Blackcomb Mountain currently offers snowmobile tours. Snowmobile tours could also occur on Whistler Mountain, with possible alpine destinations (huts and/or restaurants) being used in the future at Symphony Bowl, Harmony, or in the Westside expansion. Night skiing is also a possibility if demand warrants. As described earlier, the area surrounding Olympic Station is planned to become an on-mountain adventure centre offering other recreational activities that complement the winter skiing use and the summer mountain biking. Recreational pursuits that can take advantage of the existing and proposed buildings, as well as the large expanse of gently sloping land around Olympic Station will be developed. Although there are large numbers of people milling around this area during both the winter and summer (many mountain bikers disembarking from the gondola), there is some land that could be used for other activities without interfering with the prime skiing or mountain biking functions. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-43 September 2013

147 Summer Recreation Summer activities are extremely important to the success of the overall recreational facility and the resort destination. These activities make use of the infrastructure and accommodation facilities in place for winter recreation. Although summer activities are more concentrated in the Village and the valley floor than the winter season activities, most visitors currently make at least one trip to the top of the mountain via the existing ski lifts, primarily for sightseeing and hiking. In addition to sightseeing, hiking and mountain biking which is discussed below, the number and types of activities offered on the mountain have increased in the last few years. There are interpretative nature walks, guided wildlife viewing, horseback riding, snowshoeing in the spring, snowcat rides, horseback riding, mountain biking, ATV tours, skiing (on Blackcomb s glacier), paragliding, concerts, etc. Many of these activities use the unique environment and scenic backdrop of the mountain to provide a special experience for resort visitors. Similarly to the way these activities have emerged over the past years, we anticipate that new on-mountain activities will be more in demand in the future. Whistler Mountain intends to expand existing activities and offer further on-mountain activities in response to market demand. The following list provides suggestions of some of the activities that Whistler may propose to stage on the mountain in the future but is not meant to preclude the addition of other activities that are complementary to the overall Whistler Mountain experience. Figure 16 graphically illustrates the Whistler Mountain Summer Recreation Plan. Possible Future On-Mountain Activities Festivals and Events (using on mountain facilities during off peak hours or off peak seasons) Small Accommodation facilities for retreats, etc. Cross Country Skiing Snowmobile Rides Snowshoeing Night Skiing Horse Drawn Wagons/Sleighs Additional Food Facilities Alpine Slide or Coaster below Olympic Station terminating above the Village Water Slide Skating Rink Mini Golf Disc Golf Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-44 September 2013

148 Tubing Rock Climbing Outdoors School/Camps Ziplines/Rope Courses/Tree Canopy Adventures Lift Serviced Mountain Biking In the past fifteen years, it has been lift serviced mountain biking that has caused exponential growth in Whistler Mountain s summer visitation. With over 62.5 kilometres of trails, the Whistler Mountain Bike Park is the one of the largest parks in North America has plans to keep expanding to meet the growing number of riders. Whistler Blackcomb s vision of mountain biking in the long term involves a carefully considered expansion of trails within the areas outlined in Figure 16 Whistler Mountain Summer Recreation Plan. Trails will be developed with the intent of managing bike traffic and minimizing bottlenecks in access and egress. Care will be taken to locate trails to avoid environmentally sensitive areas or wildlife habitats. The options for mountain biking need to continue to be developed for all skill levels more trails for experts while also focusing on more interesting/new trails for intermediate riders that will encourage skill progression. In addition, the existing learning area for beginners near Olympic Station needs to be improved and expanded. The areas of new trail development include: Garbanzo/Red Zone: Expansion of intermediate trail options with easier flow trails Peak Zone: The Top of the World Trail is currently the only mountain bike trail accessed via the Peak Express chairlift. Over time, additional trails on the lower mountain will be linked to the Top of the World to increase the options for a top to bottom mountain biking descent. Links to the existing cross-country mountain bike trails below Highway 86 are also planned. Creekside zone: Development of trails leading from the Garbanzo zone (accessed via the Garbanzo Lift) over towards Franz and down to the Creekside base. Trails to be built in phases with return to the Village initially via shuttle bus and when sufficient trails are built, lift service would be provided by the Creekside Gondola lift. The Creekside Gondola area could also be used to complete an uphill hiking trail with lift downloading offering a Grouse Grind experience, once the lift is operating for mountain biking. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-45 September 2013

149 Crankworx Mountain Bike Festival at Base of Whistler Mountain.10 Spearhead/Fitzsimmons Hut System Both Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains are highly supportive of the proposed Spearhead/Fitzsimmons Hut System. The Hut System is being proposed by non government organizations (NGO s) led by the Alpine Club of Canada, Whistler Section. A system of three huts was proposed by the BC Mountaineering Club (BCMC) in 1965 and one hut was built at Russet Lake near Singing Pass. The Singing Pass area has magnificent views of the Fitzsimmons and Spearhead Mountain ranges and the Cheakamus Glacier. Some of the area is accessible by the alpine route crossing Piccolo, Flute and Oboe summits on a route known as the Musical Bumps. The Russet Lake Hut is also referred to as the Himmelsbach Hut named after Werner Himmelsbach who did much of the work in constructing the hut. The Himmelsbach Hut at Russet Lake can accommodate twelve people, although a busy Saturday night often experiences twenty with some having to sleep outside in tents. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-46 September 2013

150 The main object of the Spearhead/Fitzsimmons Hut system is to provide access to a wide variety of outdoor enthusiasts while providing shelter and overnight accommodation in appropriate locations that allows people to ski or hike the Spearhead Traverse in all seasons. The Spearhead Traverse is about 42 kilometres from the top of the Showcase T-bar on Blackcomb to the bottom of Whistler Village via the Singing Pass Trail. This is one of THE classic ski tour routes in North America with most skiers taking 2 to 3 days to complete the tour from Blackcomb to Whistler Village via the Spearhead and Fitzsimmons ranges. It is a high elevation traverse that stays above 1,825 metres (6,000 ft.) for almost the whole route, crossing 13 glaciers en-route. The Alpine Club of Canada is identifying a number of potential sites for the locations of the huts. On the Blackcomb side, one leading site is a hut at Circle Lake, which is a spectacular site about 3-4 hours hike in the summer from the Rendezvous Restaurant. The Circle Lake Hut is in the planning phase. On the SW side (Whistler side), the likely location for the first hut on that side is a replacement of the Himmelsbach Hut at Russet Lake. It is ideally situated as a summer and winter destination. One or two more huts are planned and their locations are currently in discussion between the ACC, BCMC and other NGO s and Garibaldi Provincial Park authorities. Whistler Blackcomb s role is a pragmatic ongoing one. Since the early 1990 s, they have worked closely with BC Parks on developing a seamless trail system between the CRA and Park. High Note, Decker and Overlord trails are some of the results of this working relationship; a relationship that is recognized in the Province as a model of cooperation for improving park access for British Columbians. Whistler Blackcomb have been in discussion with Parks for some time on the next steps to continue the trail development to include the connection of the Musical Bumps into Cheakamus Lake and the Upper Spearhead connector. Whistler Blackcomb s primary interest is continuing the trail development with public support and the right financial mechanisms. Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains are supportive of this NGO endeavour with consultation and respect of BC Parks master planning and referral process, as they are in a position to play a role providing transport of recreationists to reduce the long approach time through the coastal forest up to the sub-alpine and alpine zones. The Whistler Blackcomb lift systems provide access in winter and summer. In the winter season, access from the Blackcomb side is from the top of the Showcase T-Bar and from the Whistler side from the top of the Symphony Express Chair on the top of Piccolo summit. In the summer, lift assisted access is to the Roundhouse Lodge on Whistler Mountain or from the Rendezvous Lodge on Blackcomb. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update V-47 September 2013

151 VI. BASE AREA FACILITIES The purpose of this section of the report is to outline the base facilities that are required to support the planned expansion of Whistler Mountain, as described in the Mountain Facilities section. Since the two mountains are connected via the PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola, many of the base facilities including accommodation, parking and skier services such as ticketing, rental and lockers will service skiers using either mountain..1 Valley Staging Overview In the Development Analysis section, we outlined the potential for peak days with skier visits in the order of 35,500 to 39,300 skiers. As outlined in Table VI.1, approximately 12,940 skiers will be coming from accommodation within walking distance of the Creekside or Whistler Village bases. The remaining skiers will need to either drive and park, take public transit or be dropped off to get to the lifts. TABLE VI.1 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB PEAK DAY SKIER ORIGINS AT BUILDOUT Developed Bed Units at Buildout Hotel TA Multi Single Resident Hostel Camp- Family Family Restricted Skiers Pension ground Duplex South of Creekside ,286 3,360 2,312 3,400 Creekside - 1, , ,110 Between Creekside & Village 176 1,104 3,487 4, ,660 Whistler Village 3, ,320 Upper Village 1,674 3,491 3, ,160 Village North 1, , ,350 North of Village North 1, ,051 11,904 2,592 6,620 Totals 8,545 9,282 15,222 21,480 6,744 26,620 Day Skiers from Outside Whistler - 20 to 25% of all skiers 7,099 to 9,933 Weekend & Destination Skiers on First Day of Trip - 5% to 7% of all skiers 1,775 to 2,740 Total Skiers 35,493 to 39,293 Skier Parking Due to the large number of day skiers and skiers originating from accommodation beyond skier walking distance of a valley staging lift, skier parking Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 1 September 2013

152 will continue to play an important role in ensuring an adequate supply of skiers to Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains. The location of the parking lots at build-out are illustrated in Figure 17 Valley Staging Lifts and Parking at Buildout and summarized in Table VI.2. Whistler Blackcomb currently controls and operates skier parking facilities at Creekside and on the Blackcomb Benchlands in Lots 6, 7 and 8. The Village Day Lots (P1 to P5) are owned by the RMOW and managed by Whistler Blackcomb on a year round basis. The plan also indicates new parking areas at Cheakamus, the South Base, Nordic and a reconfiguration of parking on the Blackcomb Benchlands. The Creekside parkade contains 1,268 stalls for skiers, 6 charter bus stalls, drop-off areas for Whistler Kids and 164 stalls allocated as parking for the commercial businesses. The PEAK 2 PEAK gondola makes the Creekside parkade an attractive choice for day skiers arriving from south of Whistler. By uploading here, day skiers and skiers from accommodation south of Creekside avoid the most congested section of Highway #99 between Creekside and the Village. After the Olympics, a 125 stall parking lot (P11) was created by converting the land used for the finish and spectator area of the Alpine Skiing Venue on the timing flats above Whistler Creekside to parking. This lot is accessible from Nordic Drive and would be most convenient for skiers that originate from accommodation in the Nordic neighbourhood since they would not need to use the highway to get to parking. Skiers parking in this lot would need to have their own equipment and would ski down to Creekside to access the mountain. Use of the lot will be restricted to skiers originating within Nordic to avoid attracting external traffic to the neighbourhood. There are approximately 1,500 existing parking stalls in the Lots 6, 7 and 8 and along the road on the Blackcomb Benchlands near Base II. Future reconfigurations of the facilities at Base II will continue to provide at least 1,500 parking stalls for skiers in the area. The exact location of these parking stalls will be determined during detailed design of the proposed recreational facilities and administration space planned for Base II. Provision of the 1,500 stalls will require the new Lot 9 and possibly a parking structure on Lot 7. The RMOW acquired the Village Day Skier Lots 1 to 5 from the Province of British Columbia, prior to the 2010 Olympics. The purchase agreement with the Province requires that the primary use of these lots is day skier parking for the Whistler Blackcomb ski area. Whistler Blackcomb has the responsibility for management of the lots, including snow clearing and directing how the vehicles are parked. Lots 1 to 4 were landscaped and paved in 2009 for use as the Transportation Centre during the 2010 Olympic Winter Games. Lot 5 may also be paved in the future. In 2010, the RMOW introduced pay parking in Lots 1 to 3 as part of its overall Comprehensive Transportation Strategy. Lots 4 and 5 are intended to remain Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 2 September 2013

153 as free parking for the foreseeable future. With all 5 lots paved, the Village lots would have a stated capacity of 2,079 stalls. On peak days when parking attendants are used to direct where people park and some of the circulation space is reduced, the total capacity can be increased to about 2,200 stalls. Whistler Blackcomb has requested permission to use Crown Land on the south side of Cheakamus Road near the intersection with Highway #99 to construct a satellite park and ride lot for day skiers at the entrance to the resort, as shown on Figure 18. Most of this lot was cleared and graded for parking during the 2010 Olympic Games. This lot has an approximate capacity of 450 cars. Skiers parking at this lot will be bused to Whistler Creekside until the Cheakamus-South Base Gondola (Lift X) is installed in Phase 17. Also proposed in Phase 17 is a new South Base for Whistler Mountain. This base is located at the 1,010 metre elevation on a bench above the new Cheakamus Crossing neighbourhood. There is sufficient land at the South Base to provide accommodation, parking and skier services. For the purposes of this report, we have assumed parking for 2,000 cars can be constructed at the South Base, providing a total of 2,450 new day skier stalls at the south end of Whistler. The capacity of the skier parking lots described above to provide skiers is estimated in Table VI.2. We have assumed that the average auto occupancy of cars in the pay parking lots will be higher than the free lots since pay parking tends to increase the average vehicle occupancy rates. Pay parking may also have the effect of reducing the number of non-skiers using the skier parking lots since there is a large supply of underutilized commercial pay parking under many of the village buildings that is more conveniently located for shopping than the skier lots. For the purpose of this report, we have not assumed any increases to the proportion of skier cars determined during the 1997 parking lots surveys. Given the assumptions outlined above, the designated skier parking lots can supply approximately 18,760 skiers. Therefore the proposed day skier parking supply should be adequate to meet the peak day parking demands at buildout. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 3 September 2013

154 TABLE VI.2 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB SKIERS FROM PARKING BUILDOUT Area Number Average Percent Skiers (ha.) of People Skier from Stalls per Car Cars Parking P12 Cheakamus Park n' Ride % 1,125 P13 - Whistler South Base , % 5,000 Creekside P10 - Creekside Parkade 1, % 3,107 P10 - Creekside Charter Bus % 240 P11 - Timing Flats Lot % 313 Sub-total Creekside 1,399 3,660 Village Day Skier Lots P1 - Lot % 545 P2 - Lot % 658 P3 - Lot % 1,139 P4 - Lot % 1,670 P5 - Lot % 1,080 Infill during peak periods % 272 Sub-total Village ,200 5,364 Blackcomb Base II P6 - Lot % 1,198 P7 - Lot % 1,164 P8 - Lot % 1,043 P9 - Lot % 205 Sub-total Blackcomb ,500 3,610 Total Skiers from Parking 7,549 18,759 NOTES: 1. New parking lots are shown in italics. 2. Occupancy rate of 3.2 people per car assumes pay parking. 3. Occupancy rate of 2.5 people per car assumes free parking. Timing of Parking Lot Improvements Whistler Blackcomb will continue to monitor the existing day skier parking supply and keep track of the number of occasions when the parking capacity is exceeded. There are opportunities to obtain higher skier yields from the existing parking supply by fine tuning pay parking strategies to achieve higher vehicle occupancy and skier participation rates. The future paving of Village Lot 5 may be part of this strategy. The satellite lots at the south end of Whistler would not be Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 4 September 2013

155 constructed before these measures were explored. The provision of additional parking will be considered in relation to the installation of new out of valley staging lift capacity to ensure that the lift staging capacity at each location balances with the supply of skiers from accommodation, parking and transit and private vehicle dropoff during periods of peak visitation. Whistler Blackcomb expects to start using the Timing Flats lot for overflow parking once the Creekside parkade is filling to capacity 16 days per season. Currently the Creekside parkade fills 3 to 5 days per season. Since skiers from the Cheakamus lot will initially be bused to Creekside, this lot would likely be brought on stream either when a second lift is built at Creekside or annual skier visits exceed 2.4 million skiers. Due to the requirement for busing, it would be prudent to only allow parking at the Cheakamus lot on weekends and holidays when large crowds are anticipated. The South Base parking areas will only be constructed when the South Base staging area, access chairlift (Lift Y) and beginner facilities are required. Skiers dropped off by Transit and Other Vehicles In addition to the skiers from parking lots and skiers from accommodation within walking distance of the lifts, skiers also arrive at the valley staging lifts by public transit, hotel shuttle and private vehicle drop-off. Data collected during the Lift Base Surveys carried out during the 1997 Whistler CTS suggested that between 5 and 20 percent of the people arriving at the lifts were dropped off. This component was highest at the Whistler Village lifts where there is a convenient bus and private vehicle drop-off, and lowest at Base II which requires a 10 minute drive up a winding road to reach. Since 1997, transit ridership in Whistler has increased. New hotels like the Four Seasons provide shuttle drop-off as part of their guest service. The redevelopment of Creekside included dedicated bus bays for Whistler Transit and intercity buses, as well as areas for private vehicle drop-off. For the purpose of estimating the base area staging capacity, we have assumed 10 percent of all skiers arriving at the Cheakamus-South Base gondola and the Creekside base and 20 percent of the skiers staging from the village are from transit or private vehicle dropoff. Base Area Staging Capacity Given the assumptions outlined above, the Whistler Blackcomb base area staging capacity on a peak day at buildout is approximately 37,500 skiers as outlined in Table VI.3. This number of skiers is at the middle of the range of forecasted peak day skier visits at build out. Additional parking, higher average auto occupancy or a greater use of private vehicle drop-off and public transit could all increase the theoretical base area staging capacity. Table VI.3 summarizes the base area staging Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 5 September 2013

156 capacity at buildout. We have assumed that all the skiers from the Cheakamus Park n Ride lot would take the access gondola to South Base and stage from the South Base. This lift would also appeal to people living in the new Cheakamus Crossing neighbourhood. Skiers from the Central Village Zone include those skiers staging from Base II, the Blackcomb Base and Whistler Village. As mentioned previously, skiers may park at Base II and ski down to stage up Whistler Mountain via the Village Gondola or the Fitzsimmons Express. Conversely, skiers headed to Blackcomb might decide to park at Creekside and cross to Blackcomb via the PEAK 2 PEAK Gondola, therefore this table is showing the overall base staging capacity of Whistler Blackcomb combined. TABLE VI.3 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB BASE AREA STAGING CAPACITY BUILDOUT Skiers from Skiers from Skiers Total Accomm. Cheakamus from Base in Skier Skiers Gondola Other Area Walking From Trans- Staging Distance Parking portation Capacity Cheakamus Crossing 67 1, ,311 South Base 5,000 1,311 6,311 Creekside 2,110 3, ,411 Central Village Zone 10,830 8,972 4,951 24,753 Total 13,007 18,757 1,311 5,711 37,474.2 Valley Staging Lift Requirements The purpose of this section is to provide an understanding of the existing and proposed base area staging lifts which are envisioned to support the Whistler Mountain Ski Area operation. Throughout the Whistler valley, there are currently four skier staging areas; Whistler Creekside taking skiers to the south side of Whistler Mountain, the Village with lifts to Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains, the Blackcomb Benchlands/Upper Village with the Wizard Express taking skiers up Blackcomb and Base II on Blackcomb where skiers can take the second section of the Excalibur Gondola up Blackcomb or ski down to Whistler Village to go up Whistler Mountain. The existing effective capacity of the valley staging lifts (2013/14 season) over a two hour staging period is 21,700 skiers, as outlined in Table V1.4. This is adequate to meet the average of the top 15 busiest days over the past ten seasons. On Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 6 September 2013

157 the existing peak days in the 27,000 skier range, the staging period extends to 2.5 hours. To stage the additional skiers anticipated at build out of the resort, additional staging capacity will be required. Since Blackcomb Mountain has almost reached its limits for ski trail expansion, most of the future expansion of skier terrain at Whistler Blackcomb will take place on Whistler Mountain. Therefore, most of the increase in valley staging lifts should take skiers to Whistler Mountain, requiring additional staging lifts on Whistler Mountain. TABLE VI.4 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB EXISTING VALLEY LIFT STAGING CAPACITIES Effective Lift Capacity Effective Staging Capacity (pph) 2 Hours 2.5 Hours Creekside Gondola 1,992 3,984 4,980 Whistler Village Gondola 2,244 4,488 5,610 Fitzsimmons Express 1,758 3,515 4,394 Sub-total Whistler Mtn. 5,994 11,987 14,984 Excalibur Gondola 2,340 4,680 5,850 Wizard Express 2,518 5,035 6,294 Sub-total Blackcomb Mtn. 4,858 9,715 12,144 Total Whistler Valley 10,851 21,702 27,128 As outlined in the Mountain Facilities section, increased capacity out of Creekside is planned with the Lift L (Orange) or Lift W (Big Timber) gondolas. The Cheakamus to South Base gondola (Lift X) and the South Base gondola (Lift Y) will provide a new staging route up Whistler Mountain from Cheakamus Crossing that could be very attractive for day skiers arriving from south of Whistler and for residents of Cheakamus Crossing. Additional staging capacity up Whistler Mountain from the village, if needed, can be met by capacity increases to the Village Gondola and Fitzsimmons Express. For Blackcomb Mountain, an additional staging lift from Base II is planned. Future staging lift capacities if all of the new staging lifts were installed are summarized in Table VI.5. While it will not be necessary to build all of these lifts to their maximum capacities, the option to add any of these staging routes should be preserved so that any increases in out of the valley staging capacity can be located where it best ties in with the valley transportation systems. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 7 September 2013

158 TABLE VI.5 WHISTLER BLACKCOMB FUTURE VALLEY LIFT STAGING CAPACITIES Effective Lift Capacity Effective Staging Capacity (pph) 2 Hours 2.5 Hours South Base Gondola 2,720 5,440 6,800 Big Timber Gondola 2,280 4,560 5,700 Orange Gondola 1,980 3,960 4,950 Creekside Gondola 1,992 3,984 4,980 Whistler Village Gondola 2,660 5,320 6,650 Fitzsimmons Express 2,518 5,035 6,294 Sub-total Whistler Mtn. 14,150 28,299 35,374 Excalibur Gondola 2,340 4,680 5,850 Base II - Catskinner Express 2,385 4,770 5,963 Wizard Express 2,518 5,035 6,294 Sub-total Blackcomb Mtn. 7,243 14,485 18,106 Total Whistler Valley 21,392 42,784 53,480.3 Whistler South Base The Whistler Mountain Master Plan accommodates an ultimate mountain carrying capacity of 29,800 skiers per day. In Phase 17, development of a new south base area to handle up to 6,000 skiers per day is proposed. While a detailed design for the South Base has yet to be completed, the planning team has identified approximately 23 hectares of gently sloping land suitable for base facility development on either side of Lift Y, the South Base access lift. The South Base area lies between the 985 and 1,040 metre elevations on Crown lands as illustrated in Figure 19, South Base Development. Development of the South Base will require construction of an access road from the Cheakamus Lake Road just east of the Function Junction intersection with Highway 99. Alignments for this road have been looked at on a preliminary basis and a potential alignment is illustrated in Figure 19. The South Base area also includes terrain which may be suitable for the development of residential and commercial overnight accommodation in addition to parking and skier service facilities. It should be noted that commercial and residential development is not specifically proposed in this location at this time, as only generalized land use potential has been identified on large scale mapping. The planning team further recognizes that any development of the South Base area will require detailed site and environmental investigations, suitable land tenure Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 8 September 2013

159 arrangements and a full review of community planning goals and objectives with the Resort Municipality of Whistler..4 Bed Unit Allocations In 1982, Whistler Mountain Ski Corporation negotiated an agreement with the Government of the Province of British Columbia for the right to purchase Crown Land to build accommodation to support the ski area in exchange for the provision of additional recreational development in the form of upgrading and expansion of the ski area. Development rights were to be provided in the form of bed units (overnight accommodation for one person). The number of bed units to be allocated for expansion was 0.9 bed units per unit of SAOT (Skiers At One Time) as determined by the formula below: SAOT = Lift Supplied VTM / Day x Loading Efficiency VTM Demand / Skier / Day Lift Supplied VTM/Day = Total VTM/hr. x 7.0 hrs/day = Sum (Vert. Drop x Hourly Capacity) x 7.0 hrs/day Loading Efficiency = 0.9 VTM Demand/Skier/Day = 3,048 Vertical Metres (10,000 vertical feet) The 2009 revision to Chapter II: Mountain Resorts of the Province s All Season Resort Guidelines provided a revised Bed Unit Calculation Model for Regional and Destination Mountain Resorts. Bed Unit Eligibility = Associated Percentage x Balanced Resort Capacity (BRC) For most mountain resorts where alpine skiing is the primary draw the BRC will be the Skier Carrying Capacity of the alpine ski operation. The calculation of SCC takes into account that some lifts are used as staging lifts, some lifts don t operate for the full day and the VTM Demand at each lift is a reflection of the skill class of the trails serviced by that lift. At Whistler Blackcomb, although there are a number of other activities that could be included in the calculation of Balanced Resort Capacity, the Bed Unit Eligibility based on only the alpine ski facility so far exceeds the Bed Units that have been allocated to the mountains by the RMOW under their growth management policies that adding the other activities to the calculation would be redundant. The Associated Percentage is calculated by assigning point values based on the specific existing and proposed attributes of the Mountain Resort under consideration. The total points determine the appropriate ratio of bed units to BRC. Using the new point s allocation system, the appropriate ratio of bed units to BRC for Whistler Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 9 September 2013

160 Mountain is 115% under existing conditions and 105% at buildout as determined in Table VI.6. The reason for the reduction is the overall increase in theoretical skier density resulting from the additional lifts in the Master Plan at buildout. These new lifts are required to provide the operator with some redundancy when weather conditions cause closure of portions of the mountain during the peak Christmas, President s Week and March break holiday periods. The bed unit allocations for Whistler Mountain up to and including buildout, based on these two methods are summarized in Table VI.7. Under the formula contained in 1982 Development Agreement, Whistler Mountain will have earned 64,019 Bed Units at buildout. If the formula in the 2009 revision to the All Season Resort Guidelines is applied, Whistler Mountain s bed unit entitlement at buildout will be 31,217 Bed Units. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 10 September 2013

161 TABLE VI.6 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN DETERMINATION OF ASSOCIATED PERCENTAGE FOR BED UNIT CALCULATION MODEL Existing Buildout II SKI TERRAIN (Terrain Balance) Over 35% of area either advanced or novice 2-25 to 35% of area either advanced or novice X X 3- Close to Ideal 4 - Ideal slope ratio II AVERAGE SKIER DENSITY (SKI TRAIL AREA/SCC in Skiers per Hectare) > to 40 X 2-25 to to 25 X 4-15 to 20 II ACCESSIBILITY (Travel time to skier marketplace) less than 1/2 hour 1-1/2 to 1 hours 2-1 to 1 1/2 hours 3-1 1/2 to 2 hours X X 4-2 to 2 1/2 hours 5-2 1/2 to 3 hours 6 - greater than 3 hours II ACCESS RELIABILITY Highly reliable (main highway with short mountain road) 2 - Somewhat unreliable (snow and avalanche closures) II POPULATION WITHIN 250 KILOMETERS to 30, ,000 to 100, ,000 to 250, ,000 to 500, ,000 + X X II UNIQUE QUALITIES OTHER THAN SKIING Nothing unusual. 2 - Regional attraction 3 - National attraction X X II ALL SEASON FACILITIES AT THE MOUNTAIN RESORT Limited (undeveloped with little potential) 1 - Fair (some potential for recreation facilities) 2 - Good (tennis courts, swimming pool, some mountain biking etc.) 3 - Very Good (18 hole golf course, formalized mountain biking, tennis, swimming pool) 4 - Excellent (several 18 hole golf courses, 6 or more tennis courts, swimming pool, X X arena, hiking, lift serviced mountain biking, spa, beaches, water park, etc.) II POTENTIAL LENGTH OF SEASON (based on natural & manmade snow) less than 100 days to 115 days to 130 days to 150 days days + X X II TYPE OF SNOW (Snow Conditions) Dry less than 25% of season 1 - Dry 25 to 50% of season 2 - Dry 50 to 75% of season X X 3 - Dry 75 to 90% of season 4 - Dry over 90% of season II WEATHER CONDITIONS (Hours of Bright Sunshine per Year) * Less than 1,000 hours 2-1,000 to 1,500 hours 3-1,500 to 2,000 hours X X 4 - Greater than 2,000 hours II EXPRESS LIFTS None 1 - Less Than 50% of aerial lifts 2 - Greater Than 50% of aerial lifts X X II.7.I.12 NEED FOR EMPLOYEE/RESIDENT RESTRICTED HOUSING % of employee/resident restricted bed base provided for at resort 1-25% of employee/resident restricted bed base provided for at resort 2-50% of employee/resident restricted bed base provided for at resort 3-75% of employee/resident restricted bed base provided for at resort X X 4-100% of employee/resident restricted bed base provided for at resort II FIRST NATIONS ECONOMIC PARTICIPATION IN RESORT DEVELOPMENT Resort provides non-economic benefits to the First Nations - providing ski passes for First Nation band members - promotion of First Nation cultural activities - promotion of First Nation economic activites 2 - First Nation businesses are given opportunity to bid on resort related contracts X X - Proponent provides First Nation employment opportunities - Proponent provides First Nation training opportunities 3 - Proponent provides joint venture economic opportunities with the First Nations - Aboriginal ecotourisme is an integral part of the resort tourism activities - Proponent provides First Nations employment opportunities - Proponent provides First Nation training opportunities 4 - First Nations equity partnership - Aboriginal ecotourisme is an integral part of the resort tourism activities - Proponent provides First Nations employment opportunities - Proponent provides First Nation training opportunities TOTAL POINTS ASSOCIATED PERCENTAGE OF BED UNITS TO BALANCED RESORT CAPACITY 115% 105% Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 11 September 2013

162 TABLE VI.7 WHISTLER MOUNTAIN BED UNIT ALLOCATIONS BASED ON BC PROVINCIAL GOVERNMENT POLICIES 2009 All Season 1982 Development Agreement Resort Guidelines Bed Cumulative Bed SAOT Units Bed Unit SAOT Added Earned Units SCC Eligibility Prior to ,953 3, Existing 29,902 17,949 16,154 19,691 17,990 20,689 Buildout 64,019 34,117 30,705 50,396 29,730 31,217 Notwithstanding the above, during the 1980 s the Resort Municipality of Whistler undertook a comprehensive planning process and established limits for growth within its boundaries. The limit for the growth established in the 1989 Official Community Plan (OCP) was defined as the number of bed units that would be contained within the community at the resort s buildout. This limitation on development has been reflected in subsequent versions of the OCP, although the development cap has increased for specific projects. During the process of establishing a bed unit limit for buildout, the RMOW assigned all of the available bed units to lands located within the municipality that were deemed to have development potential. As part of this process, 7,500 bed units were allocated to lands either owned or under option by Whistler Mountain Ski Corporation. Of the 7,500 bed units assigned to Whistler Mountain by the RMOW, 7,466 have been assigned to development sites within Whistler as outlined in Table VI.8, leaving 34 bed units unallocated. Of the 7,466 allocated bed units, 7,013 have been developed leaving a balance of 453 additional undeveloped bed units. Therefore Whistler Mountain has a total of 487 bed units remaining in the Whistler Mountain inventory of RMOW bed units. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 12 September 2013

163 TABLE VI-8 RMOW BED UNIT ASSIGNMENT TO WHISTLER MOUNTAIN SUMMARY OF UTILIZATION Private Public Total Used Remaining on Site Bed Units Approved by RMOW 4,290 3,210 7,500 Bed Units Utilized to Date Trade for Lower Parking Lot ,245 1,245 - Blueberry Hill ,684 1,684 - Snowridge Option Site 1 - Bear Creek Option Site 5 - Alta Vista Pointe Wolverine Crescent Whistler Heights - Taluswood 1,006 1, Waterslide Project Golden Properties (Blueberry) - expired Additional Allocation for Trion Allocated to Horstman House at Blackcomb Allocated to Blackcomb Lot E - Four Seasons Allocated to Blackcomb Lot 5 - Four Seasons Residences Whistler Creek Base (First Tracks, Legends, Evolution) Option Site 2 - Kadenwood Option Site 14 - Spring Creek Total Bed Units Allocated To Date 4,290 3,176 7,466 7, Unallocated Bed Units Total Whistler Mountain RMOW Bed Units Remaining Potential Base Area Development Sites As outlined in the previous section, under the 1982 Agreement between Whistler Mountain and the Province of British Columbia, Whistler Mountain is entitled to purchase Crown land for base area development. The purpose of this section is to briefly describe the development potential of various Option Sites for future base area development. Most of these Option Sites have been identified in previous versions of the Whistler Mountain Master Plans. The Option Sites are illustrated graphically in Figure 20. Option Site 1 Option Site 1 is a 7.3 ha. parcel which was identified in the 1982 Whistler Mountain Ski Area Plan and again in the 1991 Whistler Mountain Master Plan. Site 1 is situated adjacent to the existing Northern Lights Development above Whistler Village. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 13 September 2013

164 Option Site 2 Option Site 2 is a 5.3 ha. parcel which sits above the existing Brio Subdivision. This site was first identified in the 1991 Whistler Mountain Master Plan. Option Site 3 Option Site 3 is a 5.5 ha. parcel which sits to the south of Option Site 3 above the existing Brio Subdivision. This site was first identified in the 1991 Whistler Mountain Master Plan. Option Site 4 Option Site 4 was identified as a base area development site in the 1991 Whistler Mountain Master Plan. It is a 46+/- ha. site at the 975 metre to 1050 metre level surrounding the proposed new South Base and beginner area. This site is proposed for the new day skier base and would accommodate parking, day skier and commercial facilities and also has the potential for the development of overnight accommodation. Option Site 5 Option Site 5 is a 35.3 ha. parcel located at the 850 metre elevation above Alpha Creek that was identified for base area development in the 1991 Whistler Mountain Master Plan. Access would be from the new South Base access road originating at the Function Junction intersection. Option Site 6 Option Site 12 is located immediately to the west of the Option Site 6. It was identified as potential for base area development in the 1991 Whistler Mountain Master Plan. It covers approximately 85 hectares. Option Site 7 Option Site 7 is a 7.2 ha. parcel which is located southeast of Highway 99 above the Cheakamus Lake Road. This site was first identified in the 1991 Whistler Mountain Master Plan. When the South Base is required, this site would be at the entrance to the access road to the new base and could potentially be developed to provide base area accommodation. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VI - 14 September 2013

165 VII. ENVIRONMENTAL.1 Introduction During the 1990 s the management teams of Whistler and Blackcomb Mountains began to take a more active role in the environmental stewardship of the terrain within their CRAs. In the last ten years, they have received numerous awards for their environmental and energy conservation practices. Moving forward with the implementation of this Master Plan, WhistlerBlackcomb will continue to meet or exceed all Provincial Environmental Policies and work closely with the Ministry of the Environment and other agencies to conduct all environmental studies that may be required..2 Overview of Current Environmental Practices Whistler Blackcomb has a sustainability policy and produces an annual sustainability report. One of five key result areas in the policy is Mountain ecosystems. Whistler Blackcomb is striving for continuous improvement in land stewardship through the following efforts: Adherence with the Forest Act administered by the Ministry of Tourism, Culture and the Arts. Developing and following Guidelines of Best Practices established by the Canada West Ski Area Association (CWSAA) and the National Ski Area Association (NSAA). Whistler Blackcomb is a member of both of these associations. Developing and following the Guidelines of Best Practices of the BC Tourism Sustainability Collective. The Collective represents the six leading BC tourism companies of which Whistler Blackcomb is a member. Early adopter and partner of the Resort Municipality of Whistler 2020 Sustainability Plan which includes guidelines for Natural Areas. Whistler Blackcomb also has its own internal land use planning and standard operating procedures for mountain construction that may exceed the standards of care in the guidelines referred to above. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VII - 1 September 2013

166 .3 Sustainability Policy for Whistler Blackcomb Whistler Blackcomb has developed its own Sustainability Policy which is provided in this section of the report. Whistler Blackcomb carries out its operations in accordance with this policy. Who We Are To be the #1 mountain resort in the world, we must be the most sustainable. We are passionate mountain enthusiasts who feel a deep connection with nature. Our purpose is to create the best mountain memories in the world. We provide the link between recreation and the natural mountain environment. Our Commitment to Sustainability We began our journey towards sustainability in 1993, before environmental planning was on the radar for most companies. We have moved far beyond compliance to become an industry leader, receiving 19 Provincial, North American and International awards. Just as we evolved from compliance to leadership, the time has come to evolve once more by incorporating sustainability planning into all aspects of our business. Our goal is to reduce our ecological impacts while increasing the positive impact we have on people and communities. Key Result Areas Climate change is the single largest threat to the environmental, social and economic health of our planet. The impacts of climate change affect the health of our mountain ecosystems. By reducing our contribution to climate change and protecting our ecosystems, we will be a model for action toward sustainability. We see Whistler Blackcomb as a small community within the larger community and will work to build positive and supportive relationships both locally and globally. We will focus our sustainability efforts through the following 5 Key Result Areas. Energy 1. We will minimize our consumption of fuel and electricity through behavioral changes, retrofits, and the use of new technologies in our purchasing and construction activities. 2. We will seek out clean technologies, fuels and renewable energy sources to meet our energy demands. 3. We will reduce our carbon footprint and assist in guest and resort community reductions. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VII - 2 September 2013

167 .4 Mountain Ecosystems 4. We will continue to move beyond mitigation to take a restorative role with our mountain ecosystems. 5. By following a restorative model and improving our operating procedures and design, we will improve ecosystem vitality. 6. We will identify and protect special places. 7. We will respect and encourage the relationship between the experiences of our guests and the health of our mountain ecosystems. Symphony Bowl Gladed Trail System Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VII - 3 September 2013

168 Waste 8. Through responsible purchasing, reuse and recycling, we will strive for zero waste. 9. We will integrate new opportunities and innovative waste solutions into our current systems. 10. We will model nature as a waste-free system. Awareness and Education 11. We will expand nature-based tourism experiences. 12. We will improve awareness and education on sustainability issues through internal and external communication. 13. We will inspire others to be more sustainable in their activities and lifestyles. 14. We will communicate our successes and failures and promote our programs for the purpose of learning. Social 15. We will actively contribute to the health and welfare of our employees. 16. We will foster positive and supportive relationships with community stakeholders. 17. We will work to provide for those in need both locally and globally. By structuring a strategic plan for improving our sustainability performance and involving members at all levels of our organization and our community, we will strive for continuous improvement in our operations. Never has there been a greater sense of urgency to act..5 Whistler Blackcomb Sustainability Report 2010 In 2010, Whistler Blackcomb prepared a report outlining their sustainability practices and the steps they have to taken to develop an environmentally responsible operation. This report entitled Whistler Blackcomb Sustainability Report 2010 Our Olympic Year also highlighted a few recent projects that will have a significant impact on the resorts ongoing operations. Whistler Blackcomb intends to prepare this type of report on an annual basis as they implement more energy saving measures and monitoring tools. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VII - 4 September 2013

169 Fitzsimmons Creek Renewable Energy Project The Fitzsimmons project is an Independent Power Project located in Fitzsimmons Creek within Blackcomb Mountain s CRA. The Fitzsimmons IPP is a run of the river project with a 7.9 MW power generating station. The power station has an estimated yearly energy output of 33 Gigawatt Hours, enough energy to operate Whistler-Blackcomb or to power 3,000 homes on an annual basis. Originally envisioned by Whistler Blackcomb over eight years ago as an opportunity to offset its power consumption, the project was developed by a joint venture between Innergex Renewable Energy Inc. and Ledcor Construction. Although Whistler Blackcomb is not financially involved in the project, they were heavily involved in the planning process and it was their continued support that enabled the project to proceed despite the complication of it being located in close proximity to the bobsleigh/luge track that needed to be constructed for the Whistler Sliding Centre Venue. The environmental impacts of the installation were minimal as over 70% of the project was built under the existing footprints of a mountain access road and a snowmaking intake pond. No new powerlines were required because the powerhouse was located within 300 m of the existing electrical grid. Water will flow from the power generating station into the Fitzsimmons snowmaking intake pond. Construction commenced in 2008 and the power plant began producing power in January Energy Management In 2009, Whistler Blackcomb installed 19 new power consumption meters to improve the management of power used by the ski area. They partnered with BC Hydro to carry out an Energy Management Assessment. Information gathered from the assessment was used to draft a Sustainable Energy Management Plan that identified 5 main priorities to reduce energy consumption in the following year. An Energy Manager facilitates these actions and reports progress to BC Hydro and the senior management team on a quarterly basis. To date as part of the Power Smart Partner Program, Whistler Blackcomb has carried out retrofits that save more than 4,575,000 kwh of electricity per year, representing about 15% of their annual consumption. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VII - 5 September 2013

170 Food Waste Composting Whistler Blackcomb implemented food waste composting in all of its mountain restaurants for the 2008/2009 ski season. By partnering with Coca Cola and Seattle s Best Coffee, they replaced paper cups with reusable cups in all the facilities. They have ramped up the existing recycling program and increased the use of reusable dishes and cutlery. These changes have led to a diversion of over 800 tonnes of waste from the landfill and have resulted in cost savings of $57,000 in waste disposal fees..6 Identification of Sensitive Areas Within the Controlled Recreation Area Whistler Blackcomb is comprised of six defined watersheds with no special management designations. In 1997, in consultation with the Ministry of Forests and the Ministry of Environment, a comprehensive watershed assessment was completed of the Whistler Mountain and Blackcomb Mountain CRAs. This watershed assessment examined natural processes and evaluated the cumulative effects of forest practices on the stream systems draining the area. The results of this investigation indicate the sensitivity of the watersheds to development, provide guidance for any further development and as necessary, watershed restoration activities. With respect to restoration, a program called Operation Green-up was initiated in One and a half million dollars was allocated to improving the ecological conditions of the watersheds within the Whistler and Blackcomb Mountain CRAs. The comprehensive watershed assessment was used to identify and prioritize the projects. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VII - 6 September 2013

171 Symphony Bowl Interpretive Signage.7 Whistler Blackcomb RMOW Cheakamus Community Forest & Protected Areas Network Memorandum s of Understanding In April 2009 the Resort Municipality of Whistler (RMOW) and the Squamish Nation and Lil wat Nations signed a 25-year tenure license with the Province of British Columbia for the 30,260 hectares of forestland surrounding Whistler. Representatives from each of the partners sit on the Cheakamus Community Forest (CCF) Society Board, who oversee planning, public consultation and management of forest operations. The opportunity to participate in the community forest program arose when the Ministry of Forests and Range announced that the timber harvest volume for the area around Whistler would become available for a new tenure, or license, holder. The CCF partners felt strongly that it would be more beneficial to the communities for the tenure to be held here rather than by a private timber harvesting company from elsewhere. The natural beauty of the area is a strong draw for tourism, and the CCF Society has those values at the top of mind when planning community forest operations. Whistler Mountain Master Plan Update VII - 7 September 2013

Special Investment Project

Special Investment Project Special Investment Project MESTIA, GEORGIA 2011 Mestia Treasure of Caucasus Mestia, Central-West Caucasus, 1450 meters above the sea level surrounded by sub alpine pine and chestnut forests and majestic

More information

Prepared for: August 4 th, Presented by: Eric Callender Ecosign VP Adam Schroyen Resort Planner

Prepared for: August 4 th, Presented by: Eric Callender Ecosign VP Adam Schroyen Resort Planner TAHOE DONNER PHASE 1 & 2 INVENTORY AND TECHNICAL ASSESSMENT Prepared for: August 4 th, 2017 Presented by: Eric Callender Ecosign VP Adam Schroyen Resort Planner ECOSIGN RESORT PLANNERS (2016) LTD. Whistler,

More information

KOPAONIK SKI RESORT 2008 PROJECT RECOMMENDATIONS MARCH 28, 2008

KOPAONIK SKI RESORT 2008 PROJECT RECOMMENDATIONS MARCH 28, 2008 KOPAONIK SKI RESORT 28 PROJECT RECOMMENDATIONS MARCH 28, 28 Prepared for: Ministry of the Economy and Regional Development of Republic of Serbia Bulevar Kralja Aleksandra 15 11 Beograd, Serbia Prepared

More information

KICKING HORSE MOUNTAIN RESORT APPLICATION TO AMEND THE EXISTING CONTROLLED RECREATION AREA

KICKING HORSE MOUNTAIN RESORT APPLICATION TO AMEND THE EXISTING CONTROLLED RECREATION AREA KICKING HORSE MOUNTAIN RESORT APPLICATION TO AMEND THE EXISTING CONTROLLED RECREATION AREA September 19, 2017 File: 4403694 Reg Nolander Sr. Manager, Major Projects Mountain Resorts Branch Ministry of

More information

N o r e f j e l l K r ø d s h e r a d k o m m u n e VISION MASTER PLAN STEP 2. August 2018

N o r e f j e l l K r ø d s h e r a d k o m m u n e VISION MASTER PLAN STEP 2. August 2018 N o r e f j e l l K r ø d s h e r a d k o m m u n e VISION MASTER PLAN STEP 2 August 2018 ECOSIGN RESORT PLANNERS (2016) LTD. Whistler, British Columbia, Canada P l a n n i n g O b j e c t i v e s: 1.

More information

Briefing Paper: ONE Wasatch Ski Interconnect Concept

Briefing Paper: ONE Wasatch Ski Interconnect Concept Briefing Paper: ONE Wasatch Ski Interconnect Concept Purpose and Audience The purpose of this briefing paper is to provide information on the ONE Wasatch proposal for discussion purposes. The intent is

More information

Taos Ski Valley s 2010 Master Development Plan Phase 1 Proposed Projects

Taos Ski Valley s 2010 Master Development Plan Phase 1 Proposed Projects Taos Ski Valley s 2010 Master Development Plan Phase 1 Proposed Projects Background The majority of Taos Ski Valley s (TSV) lift and trail network is located on National Forest System (NFS) lands administered

More information

CHAPTER 1 PURPOSE OF AND NEED FOR ACTION

CHAPTER 1 PURPOSE OF AND NEED FOR ACTION CHAPTER 1 PURPOSE OF AND NEED FOR ACTION This chapter describes the current and proposed project area and summarizes the Proposed Action, the Purpose of and Need for the action, the decisions to be made,

More information

FOR SALE FOR SALE SINGLE-TENANT STRATA INVESTMENT OPPORTUNITY 4340 SUNDIAL CRESCENT (STRATA LOTS 3 & 4) WHISTLER, BC

FOR SALE FOR SALE SINGLE-TENANT STRATA INVESTMENT OPPORTUNITY 4340 SUNDIAL CRESCENT (STRATA LOTS 3 & 4) WHISTLER, BC FOR SALE JON BUCKLEY* 604 630 0215 jbuckley@form.ca CURTIS LEONHARDT* 604 638 1999 cleonhardt @form.ca JOE GENEST 604 398 4341 jgenest@form.ca *Personal Real Estate Corporation FOR SALE PROPERTY HIGHLIGHTS

More information

Medicine Bow Routt National Forest and Thunder Basin National Grassland; Routt. County; Colorado; Steamboat Ski Resort, Steamboat EIS

Medicine Bow Routt National Forest and Thunder Basin National Grassland; Routt. County; Colorado; Steamboat Ski Resort, Steamboat EIS This document is scheduled to be published in the Federal Register on 09/06/2016 and available online at http://federalregister.gov/a/2016-21236, and on FDsys.gov [3411-15-P] DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

More information

Prepared for: September 11 th, Presented by: Eric Callender Ecosign VP Adam Schroyen Resort Planner

Prepared for: September 11 th, Presented by: Eric Callender Ecosign VP Adam Schroyen Resort Planner TAHOE DONNER PHASE 1-4 TECHNICAL ASSESSMENT AND RESORT CONCEPTS Prepared for: September 11 th, 2017 Presented by: Eric Callender Ecosign VP Adam Schroyen Resort Planner ECOSIGN RESORT PLANNERS (2016) LTD.

More information

McKenzie Interchange Project Fall 2015 Engagement. Appendix 2: Engagement Materials and Feedback Form

McKenzie Interchange Project Fall 2015 Engagement. Appendix 2: Engagement Materials and Feedback Form Fall 2015 Engagement Appendix 2: Engagement Materials and Feedback Form Welcome to the McKenzie Interchange Project Open House! Purpose of Open House To provide you with information regarding the project

More information

TABLE V-4: CALCULATION OF COMFORTABLE CARRYING CAPACITY UPGRADING PLAN

TABLE V-4: CALCULATION OF COMFORTABLE CARRYING CAPACITY UPGRADING PLAN C. COMFORTABLE CARRYING CAPACITY The calculation of Mount Sunapee s Upgrading Plan CCC is described in the following table. As illustrated, the upgrading program increases the CCC of the lift and trail

More information

TRAFFIC IMPACT STUDY CRITERIA

TRAFFIC IMPACT STUDY CRITERIA Chapter 6 - TRAFFIC IMPACT STUDY CRITERIA 6.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 6.1.1. Purpose: The purpose of this document is to outline a standard format for preparing a traffic impact study in the City of Steamboat

More information

GARIBALDI AT SQUAMISH PROJECT CASP Master Plan EAO Additional Information Requirements Mountain Master Plan DRAFT

GARIBALDI AT SQUAMISH PROJECT CASP Master Plan EAO Additional Information Requirements Mountain Master Plan DRAFT GARIBALDI AT SQUAMISH PROJECT CASP Master Plan EAO Additional Information Requirements Mountain Master Plan DRAFT Prepared for: Land and Water British Columbia Inc. 200 10428 153rd Street Surrey, B.C.

More information

WELCOME TO OPEN HOUSE # 1 June 14, 2017

WELCOME TO OPEN HOUSE # 1 June 14, 2017 Langstaff Road Weston Road to Highway 7 Class Environmental Assessment Study WELCOME TO OPEN HOUSE # 1 June 14, 2017 Please sign in and join our mailing list Purpose of Open House #1 & Study Area York

More information

Exhibit 1 PLANNING COMMISSION AGENDA ITEM

Exhibit 1 PLANNING COMMISSION AGENDA ITEM Exhibit 1 PLANNING COMMISSION AGENDA ITEM Project Name: Grand Junction Circulation Plan Grand Junction Complete Streets Policy Applicant: City of Grand Junction Representative: David Thornton Address:

More information

IV. MOUNTAIN FACILITIES

IV. MOUNTAIN FACILITIES IV. MOUNTAIN FACILITIES.1 Goals and Objectives A winter resort area master plan involves planning the removal or replacement of existing equipment integrated with the addition of new facilities. It is

More information

Sixth Line Development - Transit Facilities Plan

Sixth Line Development - Transit Facilities Plan Memorandum Date: November 13, 2012 To: From: c.c. Subject: Rob Freeman (Freeman Planning) Kevin Phillips Sixth Line Development - Transit Facilities Plan 33016631 This memo was prepared to review the transit

More information

Welcome to the McKenzie Interchange Project Open House!

Welcome to the McKenzie Interchange Project Open House! Welcome to the McKenzie Interchange Project Open House! Purpose of Open House To provide you with information regarding the project and for you to have the opportunity to share your input on design concepts.

More information

TABLE IV-4: CALCULATION OF COMFORTABLE CARRYING CAPACITY EXISTING CONDITIONS. Access Role. Hourly Capacity. Oper. Hours

TABLE IV-4: CALCULATION OF COMFORTABLE CARRYING CAPACITY EXISTING CONDITIONS. Access Role. Hourly Capacity. Oper. Hours C. COMFORTABLE CARRYING CAPACITY The daily carrying capacity of a resort is described as the Comfortable Carrying Capacity (CCC). CCC is not a cap on visitation, but is rather a design standard defined

More information

SOLITUDE MOUNTAIN RESORT MASTER DEVELOPMENT PLAN AMENDMENT PROPOSAL

SOLITUDE MOUNTAIN RESORT MASTER DEVELOPMENT PLAN AMENDMENT PROPOSAL SOLITUDE MOUNTAIN RESORT MASTER DEVELOPMENT PLAN AMENDMENT PROPOSAL 6/02/14 INTRODUCTION Solitude Mountain Resort s (Solitude) current Master Development Plan (MDP) was accepted by the Wasatch-Cache National

More information

ADOT Statewide Bicycle and Pedestrian Program Summary of Phase IV Activities APPENDIX B PEDESTRIAN DEMAND INDEX

ADOT Statewide Bicycle and Pedestrian Program Summary of Phase IV Activities APPENDIX B PEDESTRIAN DEMAND INDEX ADOT Statewide Bicycle and Pedestrian Program Summary of Activities APPENDIX B PEDESTRIAN DEMAND INDEX May 24, 2009 Pedestrian Demand Index for State Highway Facilities Revised: May 29, 2007 Introduction

More information

Winter is fast approaching and it is finally time to hit the slopes! With the upcoming 2018 Winter Olympics in

Winter is fast approaching and it is finally time to hit the slopes! With the upcoming 2018 Winter Olympics in Team 7410 HiMCM Page 1 of 17 Summary: Winter is fast approaching and it is finally time to hit the slopes! With the upcoming 2018 Winter Olympics in mind, investors are looking to develop a new high-end

More information

TIMBERLINE MOUNTAIN SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY

TIMBERLINE MOUNTAIN SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY DESIGN CRITERIA TIMBERLINE MOUNTAIN SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY The upgrading and expansion of a ski area is influenced by a variety of ski facility design criteria that help to create a quality ski experience.

More information

An opportunity for summer revenue at the Camden Snow Bowl. Summer Snow Bowl Lift Serve Mountain Biking, Version 2

An opportunity for summer revenue at the Camden Snow Bowl. Summer Snow Bowl Lift Serve Mountain Biking, Version 2 An opportunity for summer revenue at the Camden Snow Bowl By: The Mountain Bike Subgroup of the Snow Bowl Four Season Committee Summer Snow Bowl Lift Serve Mountain Biking, Version 2 Summer Snow Bowl Lift

More information

MEDIA FACT SHEET. Holiday Valley Resort Ellicottville, New York. Background:

MEDIA FACT SHEET. Holiday Valley Resort Ellicottville, New York. Background: 2015-16 Winter Season MEDIA FACT SHEET Holiday Valley Resort Ellicottville, New York Background: Holiday Valley, in Western New York State is a leading eastern North American winter resort. Fifty-eight

More information

Table 1: Original and adjusted slope gradients for each difficulty rating Traditional Ranges Adjusted Ranges

Table 1: Original and adjusted slope gradients for each difficulty rating Traditional Ranges Adjusted Ranges 1 Summary Nothing beats a day spent skiing. Except, of course, a day spent designing slopes for skiing. As winter looms closer, some wealthy investors are considering purchasing Wasatch Ranch in Utah.

More information

DON MILLS-EGLINTON Mobility Hub Profile

DON MILLS-EGLINTON Mobility Hub Profile Mobility Hub Profile Dundas Don Mills-Eglinton West-Bloor Anchor Hub Gateway Hub N MOBILITY HUBS: Places of connectivity between regional and rapid transit services, where different modes of transportation

More information

North Vancouver Community Associations Network. November 15, pm to 9 pm

North Vancouver Community Associations Network. November 15, pm to 9 pm North Vancouver Community Associations Network November 15, 2017 7 pm to 9 pm Topics Decision-making processes and constraints What is TransLink? What financial and planning requirements does TransLink

More information

Why do we need a Gondola?

Why do we need a Gondola? Why do we need a Gondola? Volume Translink buses serve 25,000 transit trips a day on and off Burnaby Mountain. To serve this volume, a bus leaves the bus loop at the top of the mountain every 90 seconds

More information

STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR DEVELOPMENT OF THE OREGON SHORT LINE TERMINUS HISTORIC DISTRICT

STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR DEVELOPMENT OF THE OREGON SHORT LINE TERMINUS HISTORIC DISTRICT STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR DEVELOPMENT OF THE OREGON SHORT LINE TERMINUS HISTORIC DISTRICT & AN EXECUTIVE SUMMARY OF THE HEART OF WEST YELLOWSTONE CONCEPTUAL PLANNING REPORT November 2004 PREPARED BY The Portico

More information

Spearfish Canyon State Park & Bismarck Lake

Spearfish Canyon State Park & Bismarck Lake Spearfish Canyon State Park & Bismarck Lake Land Exchange Between the U.S. Forest Service and the State of South Dakota July 12, 2016 Background In 2006, the State of South Dakota received title to several

More information

Games. Emergency Preparedness for Industry and Commerce Council. Resort Municipality of Whistler Sharon Fugman, Manager 2010 Winter Games

Games. Emergency Preparedness for Industry and Commerce Council. Resort Municipality of Whistler Sharon Fugman, Manager 2010 Winter Games Whistler and the 2010 Winter Games Emergency Preparedness for Industry and Commerce Council Resort Municipality of Whistler Sharon Fugman, Manager 2010 Winter Games May 26, 2010 0 Introduction Today s

More information

Corporate. Report COUNCIL DATE: June 26, 2006 NO: C012 COUNCIL-IN-COMMITTEE. TO: Mayor & Council DATE: June 22, 2006

Corporate. Report COUNCIL DATE: June 26, 2006 NO: C012 COUNCIL-IN-COMMITTEE. TO: Mayor & Council DATE: June 22, 2006 Corporate NO: C012 Report COUNCIL DATE: June 26, 2006 COUNCIL-IN-COMMITTEE TO: Mayor & Council DATE: June 22, 2006 FROM: General Manager, Engineering FILE: 0410-20(MoT/Gate) SUBJECT: Surrey Response on

More information

SQUAW VALLEY FUNITEL

SQUAW VALLEY FUNITEL SQUAW VALLEY FUNITEL AN INSTALLATION FOR THE THIRD MILLENNIUM Co presentation: Ernst Egli, PE Hans Burkhart Director for Marketing and Sales Gen. Manager Garaventa AG Squaw Valley Ski Corp. Switzerland

More information

ROUTES 55 / 42 / 676 BUS RAPID TRANSIT LOCALLY PREFERRED ALTERNATIVE

ROUTES 55 / 42 / 676 BUS RAPID TRANSIT LOCALLY PREFERRED ALTERNATIVE ROUTES 55 / 42 / 676 BUS RAPID TRANSIT LOCALLY PREFERRED ALTERNATIVE April, 2012 1 INTRODUCTION The need for transit service improvements in the Routes 42/55/676 corridor was identified during the Southern

More information

9 Leeming Drive Redevelopment Ottawa, ON Transportation Brief. Prepared By: Stantec Consulting Ltd.

9 Leeming Drive Redevelopment Ottawa, ON Transportation Brief. Prepared By: Stantec Consulting Ltd. 9 Leeming Drive Redevelopment Ottawa, ON Transportation Brief Prepared By: Stantec Consulting Ltd. TIA GUIDELINES CHECKLIST Report Context Municipal Address Comment: Section 1.1 Location relative to major

More information

Prepared For: Shieldbay Developments Inc. c/o Matson, McConnell Ltd. 2430A Bloor Street West Toronto, Ontario M6S 1P9.

Prepared For: Shieldbay Developments Inc. c/o Matson, McConnell Ltd. 2430A Bloor Street West Toronto, Ontario M6S 1P9. Prepared For: Shieldbay Developments Inc. c/o Matson, McConnell Ltd. 2430A Bloor Street West Toronto, Ontario M6S 1P9 Prepared By: URS Canada Inc. 4 th Floor, 30 Leek Crescent Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B

More information

Briefing Paper #1. An Overview of Regional Demand and Mode Share

Briefing Paper #1. An Overview of Regional Demand and Mode Share 2011 Metro Vancouver Regional Trip Diary Survey Briefing Paper #1 An Overview of Regional Demand and Mode Share Introduction The 2011 Metro Vancouver Regional Trip Diary Survey is the latest survey conducted

More information

Hlíðarfjall, Akureyri Mountain Resort Master Plan

Hlíðarfjall, Akureyri Mountain Resort Master Plan Hlíðarfjall, Akureyri Mountain Resort Master Plan From City Park to Mountain Destination Executive Summary September 2009 Prepared for: Vetraríþróttamiðstöð Íslands Glerárgötu 26 600 Akureyri Prepared

More information

APPENDIX 3: EAGLECREST MASTER PLAN PUBLIC OPINION SURVEYS

APPENDIX 3: EAGLECREST MASTER PLAN PUBLIC OPINION SURVEYS APPENDIX 3: EAGLECREST MASTER PLAN PUBLIC OPINION SURVEYS Eaglecrest Master Plan Public Opinion Surveys Prepared for Eaglecrest Ski Area Board of Directors Prepared by McDowell Group Inc. Eaglecrest Master

More information

4. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ANALYSIS 9. TRANSPORTATION AND TRAFFIC

4. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ANALYSIS 9. TRANSPORTATION AND TRAFFIC 4. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ANALYSIS 9. TRANSPORTATION AND TRAFFIC 4.9.1 INTRODUCTION The following section addresses the Proposed Project s impact on transportation and traffic based on the Traffic Study

More information

NEWMARKET CENTRE Mobility Hub Profile

NEWMARKET CENTRE Mobility Hub Profile Mobility Hub Profile Dundas Newmarket West-Bloor Centre Anchor Hub Gateway Hub N MOBILITY HUBS: Places of connectivity between regional and rapid transit services, where different modes of transportation

More information

TRAFFIC STUDY GUIDELINES Clarksville Street Department

TRAFFIC STUDY GUIDELINES Clarksville Street Department TRAFFIC STUDY GUIDELINES Clarksville Street Department 9/1/2009 Introduction Traffic studies are used to help the city determine potential impacts to the operation of the surrounding roadway network. Two

More information

Chapter 5 Future Transportation

Chapter 5 Future Transportation Chapter 5 Future Transportation The Future Land Use Plan identifies the desired land use designations. The land uses desired for Crozet depend, in large part, on the success of the transportation system,

More information

MEETING Agenda. Introductions. Project Overview. Key Study Components. Alternative Station Concepts. Preferred Station Concept. Next Steps.

MEETING Agenda. Introductions. Project Overview. Key Study Components. Alternative Station Concepts. Preferred Station Concept. Next Steps. City GARLAND Council ROADVISION Briefing STUDY VISION STUDY Dallas, TX April 8, 2010 1 1 MEETING Agenda Introductions Project Overview Key Study Components Alternative Station Concepts Preferred Station

More information

Oakmont Area Structure Plan

Oakmont Area Structure Plan Oakmont Area Structure Plan Bylaw 12/97 Consolidated by Bylaw 25/2013 (Approved August 26, 2013) CITY OF ST. ALBERT CONSOLIDATION OF BYLAW 12/97 Consolidated by Bylaw 25/2013 Being a bylaw to adopt the

More information

West Dimond Blvd Upgrade Jodhpur Street to Sand Lake Road

West Dimond Blvd Upgrade Jodhpur Street to Sand Lake Road West Dimond Blvd Jodhpur St to Sand Lake CSS Transportation Project Summary Municipality of Anchorage Project # 05 005 Project Manager: John Smith, P.E. (MOA PM&E) Project Administrator: Julie Makela,

More information

Team 7416 HiMCM 2017 Page 1 of 24. Olympic ski slopes are difficult to plan, and a ranch in Utah is being evaluated to

Team 7416 HiMCM 2017 Page 1 of 24. Olympic ski slopes are difficult to plan, and a ranch in Utah is being evaluated to Team 7416 HiMCM 2017 Page 1 of 24 Summary Olympic ski slopes are difficult to plan, and a ranch in Utah is being evaluated to determine whether or not it should host an event. The measurements and difficulty

More information

PEDESTRIAN ACTION PLAN

PEDESTRIAN ACTION PLAN ATTACHMENT 2 CITY OF SANTA MONICA PEDESTRIAN ACTION PLAN CITY OF SANTA MONICA PEDESTRIAN ACTION PLAN This page intentionally left blank EXECUTIVE SUMMARY CHAPTER 1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Setting the Stage

More information

Executive Summary. General Overview of Business

Executive Summary. General Overview of Business Executive Summary Project Vision The Murray Ridge Ski Area was established in 1975 to provide affordable skiing opportunities for the residents of Fort St. James and surrounding area. This vision continues.

More information

Proposed. City of Grand Junction Complete Streets Policy. Exhibit 10

Proposed. City of Grand Junction Complete Streets Policy. Exhibit 10 Proposed City of Grand Junction Complete Streets Policy Exhibit 10 1 City of Grand Junction Complete Streets Policy Vision: The Complete Streets Vision is to develop a safe, efficient, and reliable travel

More information

2017/2018 WINTER GROUPS BOOKING PACKAGE

2017/2018 WINTER GROUPS BOOKING PACKAGE 2017/2018 WINTER GROUPS BOOKING PACKAGE Thanks for choosing The Lake Louise Ski Resort for your winter adventure! We can create memorable experiences for groups of all sizes. We offer packages that include

More information

TRANSPORTATION & MOBILITY

TRANSPORTATION & MOBILITY TRANSPORTATION & MOBILITY ROADWAY SYSTEM There are approximately 40 miles of roadways in Manitou Springs. For planning purposes, roadways are typically assigned a functional classification which defines

More information

Standing Committee on Policy and Strategic Priorities

Standing Committee on Policy and Strategic Priorities POLICY REPORT Report Date: January 15, 2019 Contact: Steve Brown Contact No.: 604.873.9733 RTS No.: 12955 VanRIMS No.: 08-2000-20 Meeting Date: January 30, 2019 TO: FROM: SUBJECT: Standing Committee on

More information

DRAFT. Malibu Bluffs Park Skate Park Facility Site Assessment. Prepared For: The City of Malibu Parks and Recreation Department

DRAFT. Malibu Bluffs Park Skate Park Facility Site Assessment. Prepared For: The City of Malibu Parks and Recreation Department Malibu Bluffs Park Skate Park Facility Site Assessment Prepared For: The City of Malibu Parks and Recreation Department Prepared on February 28, 2013 By: 1 INTRODUCTION AND PROJECT BACKGROUND For more

More information

TRAVEL PLAN: CENTRAL EUROPEAN UNIVERSITY CAMPUS REDEVELOPMENT PROJECT TRAVEL PLAN. Central European University Campus Redevelopment Project.

TRAVEL PLAN: CENTRAL EUROPEAN UNIVERSITY CAMPUS REDEVELOPMENT PROJECT TRAVEL PLAN. Central European University Campus Redevelopment Project. TRAVEL PLAN Central European University Campus Redevelopment Project Page 1 Table of Contents Introduction... 3 Background... 7 Building Users... 7 Transportation in Community Consultation... 7 Summary

More information

DRAFT BUENA VISTA 2020 TRANSPORTATION PLAN

DRAFT BUENA VISTA 2020 TRANSPORTATION PLAN DRAFT BUENA VISTA 2020 TRANSPORTATION PLAN DEVELOPED BY THE TRANSPORTATION PLANNING DIVISION OF THE VIRGINIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION IN COOPERATION WITH THE U.S. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION, FEDERAL

More information

Chapter 7. Transportation. Transportation Road Network Plan Transit Cyclists Pedestrians Multi-Use and Equestrian Trails

Chapter 7. Transportation. Transportation Road Network Plan Transit Cyclists Pedestrians Multi-Use and Equestrian Trails Chapter 7 Transportation Transportation Road Network Plan Transit Cyclists Pedestrians Multi-Use and Equestrian Trails 7.1 TRANSPORTATION BACKGROUND The District of Maple Ridge faces a number of unique

More information

HOUSE BILL NO. HB0032. Sponsored by: Joint Travel, Recreation, Wildlife & Cultural Resources Interim Committee A BILL. for

HOUSE BILL NO. HB0032. Sponsored by: Joint Travel, Recreation, Wildlife & Cultural Resources Interim Committee A BILL. for 0 STATE OF WYOMING LSO-00 HOUSE BILL NO. HB00 Ski Safety Act. Sponsored by: Joint Travel, Recreation, Wildlife & Cultural Resources Interim Committee A BILL for AN ACT relating to skiing; imposing duties

More information

City of Hamilton s Transportation Master Plan (TMP) Public Consultation 3 December 2015

City of Hamilton s Transportation Master Plan (TMP) Public Consultation 3 December 2015 City of Hamilton s Transportation Master Plan (TMP) Public Consultation 3 December 2015 McPhail Transportation Planning Services Ltd. AGENDA 6:00 7:00 pm Viewing Boards / Q & A with the Team 7:00 7:50

More information

Pedestrian Crosswalk Audit

Pedestrian Crosswalk Audit 1200, Scotia Place, Tower 1 10060 Jasper Avenue Edmonton, Alberta T5J 3R8 edmonton.ca/auditor Pedestrian Crosswalk Audit June 19, 2017 The conducted this project in accordance with the International Standards

More information

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY: TRANSIT-ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT IN SMITHS FALLS, ONTARIO; A COMPARISON BETWEEN TWO SITES

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY: TRANSIT-ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT IN SMITHS FALLS, ONTARIO; A COMPARISON BETWEEN TWO SITES EECUTIVE SUMMARY: TRANSIT-ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT IN SMITHS FALLS, ONTARIO; A COMPARISON BETWEEN TWO SITES Topic and Purpose In 2007, the Mayor of Ottawa s Task Force on Transportation suggested adding a

More information

WORLD-CLASS LAKE TAHOE DEVELOPMENT OPPORTUNITY

WORLD-CLASS LAKE TAHOE DEVELOPMENT OPPORTUNITY WORLD-CLASS LAKE TAHOE DEVELOPMENT OPPORTUNITY 33441 KIRKWOOD MEADOWS DRIVE, KIRKWOOD, CA. Entitled Residential Project Slope-Side at Kirkwood Mountain Resort Multiple Development Options DEVELOPMENT SITE

More information

Comments The Plan for Port Whitby

Comments The Plan for Port Whitby Comments The Plan for Port Whitby April 24th, 2013 Community Meeting #2 Summary Report Prepared by GLPi April 29th, 2013 1 Introduction The purpose of the Port Whitby Secondary Plan Update, Community Improvement

More information

Report on Winter Tourism Centre of Konaklı Village, Erzurum

Report on Winter Tourism Centre of Konaklı Village, Erzurum NORTHEAST ANATOLIA DEVELOPMENT AGENCY Report on Winter Tourism Centre of Konaklı Village, Erzurum Tourism Reports No:2 Süleyman TOY Emine Bilgen EYMİRLİ Murat KARAPINAR Erzurum 2010 Northeast Anatolia

More information

University of Victoria Campus Cycling Plan Terms of Reference. 1.0 Project Description

University of Victoria Campus Cycling Plan Terms of Reference. 1.0 Project Description University of Victoria Campus Cycling Plan Terms of Reference 1.0 Project Description The Campus Cycling Plan, a first for the University, will provide a comprehensive and coordinated approach to support

More information

TRAFFIC IMPACT STUDY COMPREHENSIVE UPDATE TOWN OF THOMPSON S STATION, TENNESSEE PREPARED FOR: THE TOWN OF THOMPSON S STATION

TRAFFIC IMPACT STUDY COMPREHENSIVE UPDATE TOWN OF THOMPSON S STATION, TENNESSEE PREPARED FOR: THE TOWN OF THOMPSON S STATION TRAFFIC IMPACT STUDY COMPREHENSIVE UPDATE TOWN OF THOMPSON S STATION, TENNESSEE PREPARED FOR: THE TOWN OF THOMPSON S STATION Transportation Consultants, LLC 1101 17 TH AVENUE SOUTH NASHVILLE, TN 37212

More information

Vision: Traditional hamlet with an attractive business/pedestrian friendly main street connected to adjacent walkable neighborhoods

Vision: Traditional hamlet with an attractive business/pedestrian friendly main street connected to adjacent walkable neighborhoods N D. Focus Area II Vision: Traditional hamlet with an attractive business/pedestrian friendly main street connected to adjacent walkable neighborhoods Transit Road Focus Area II is located in the Hamlet

More information

WHITE PAPER: TRANSIT SERVICE FOR SOUTH SHAGANAPPI

WHITE PAPER: TRANSIT SERVICE FOR SOUTH SHAGANAPPI 9/27/2012 TRANSIT PLANNING WHITE PAPER: TRANSIT SERVICE FOR SOUTH SHAGANAPPI 2012 Calgary Transit 1 Table of Contents Purpose... 3 Area of Change... 3 Background... 3 Access to destinations... 5 Connecting

More information

REDWOOD CITY STREETCAR - ALTERNATIVES ANALYSIS

REDWOOD CITY STREETCAR - ALTERNATIVES ANALYSIS REDWOOD CITY STREETCAR - ALTERNATIVES ANALYSIS The purpose of this document is to ennumerate the analysis of alternatives for a streetcar along the Broadway Corriodor of Redwood City. The six alternatives

More information

VAIL HOMEOWNERS ASSOCIATION, INC. VHA Action Notice: Update on Golden Peak Proposal April 10, 2017

VAIL HOMEOWNERS ASSOCIATION, INC. VHA Action Notice: Update on Golden Peak Proposal April 10, 2017 Existing view of Golden Peak - note cut to the summit, made in the 1960 s, for a lift that was never built Approximate view of Golden Peak once construction of proposed race course and lift to the summit

More information

3.0 Future Conditions

3.0 Future Conditions 3.0 Future Conditions In order to be able to recommend appropriate improvements to the transportation system of the Town, it is important to first understand the nature and volume of traffic that is expected

More information

DON MILLS-SHEPPARD Mobility Hub Profile

DON MILLS-SHEPPARD Mobility Hub Profile DON MILLS-SHEPPARD Mobility Hub Profile Dundas Don Mills-Sheppard West-Bloor Anchor Hub Gateway Hub N MOBILITY HUBS: Places of connectivity between regional and rapid transit services, where different

More information

What can we expect from the 2010 Olympics?

What can we expect from the 2010 Olympics? Vancouver Real Estate Forum What can we expect from the 2010 Olympics? April 23, 2009 Olympic Excitement Builds Only 295 Days Away! 2 2010 Benefits Generate sustainable economic benefits for host communities

More information

Vancouver 2010 Olympic Winter Games Venue Locations

Vancouver 2010 Olympic Winter Games Venue Locations 1.0 INTRODUCTION On July 2, 2003, Members of the International Olympic Committee (IOC) selected Vancouver and Whistler as the host cities of the 2010 Olympic and Paralympic Winter Games. Consequently,

More information

CITY OF ALPHARETTA DOWNTOWN MASTER PLAN TRAFFIC EVALUATION

CITY OF ALPHARETTA DOWNTOWN MASTER PLAN TRAFFIC EVALUATION CITY OF ALPHARETTA DOWNTOWN MASTER PLAN TRAFFIC EVALUATION June 2015 CITY OF ALPHARETTA DOWNTOWN MASTER PLAN TRAFFIC EVALUATION Introduction The Alpharetta Downtown Master Plan was developed in the fall

More information

Active Transportation Infrastructure Investment A Business Case

Active Transportation Infrastructure Investment A Business Case Active Transportation Infrastructure Investment A Business Case In 2016, the Real Estate Foundation awarded the Capital Regional District a $50,000 grant for Shifting Gears: Land Use Change through Active

More information

AN EXPERIENCE YOU WILL REMEMBER FOREVER

AN EXPERIENCE YOU WILL REMEMBER FOREVER AN EXPERIENCE YOU WILL REMEMBER FOREVER RATES & SCHEDULE 2018 SCHEDULE & RATES 02 2018 CPG SCHEDULE & RATES CPG CAN DELIVER THE SKIING OR RIDING EXPERIENCE OF YOUR LIFE Chugach Powder Guides has delivered

More information

Overview. Existing Conditions. Corridor Description. Assessment

Overview. Existing Conditions. Corridor Description. Assessment Overview A study of the 23 rd Street corridor was undertaken to document the existing conditions, analyze traffic operations, and recommend remedies for deficient situations Although 23 rd Street is frequently

More information

South King County High-Capacity Transit Corridor Study

South King County High-Capacity Transit Corridor Study HIGH-CAPACITY TRANSIT CORRIDOR STUDY South King County Corridor South King County High-Capacity Transit Corridor Study Corridor Report August 2014 South King County High Capacity Transit Corridor Report

More information

Team 7414 HiMCM /12

Team 7414 HiMCM /12 Team 7414 HiMCM 2017 1/12 Ski Slope Problem Wasatch Peaks Ranch in Peterson, Utah is for sale, and a group of wealthy winter sport fans and their agent, Ms. Mogul, are looking for a new mountain to develop

More information

Characteristics from these programs were used to compare to and evaluate existing conditions in Howard County.

Characteristics from these programs were used to compare to and evaluate existing conditions in Howard County. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Bike share is a mobility option that allows users to access a fleet of public bicycles throughout a community. Bike share systems have successfully been implemented in communities throughout

More information

TRAFFIC IMPACT STUDY And A TRAFFIC SIGNAL WARRANT ANALYSIS FOR A SENIOR LIVING AND APARTMENT DEVELOPMENT

TRAFFIC IMPACT STUDY And A TRAFFIC SIGNAL WARRANT ANALYSIS FOR A SENIOR LIVING AND APARTMENT DEVELOPMENT TRAFFIC IMPACT STUDY And A TRAFFIC SIGNAL WARRANT ANALYSIS FOR A SENIOR LIVING AND APARTMENT DEVELOPMENT DEERFIELD TOWNSHIP, WARREN COUNTY, OHIO Nantucket Circle and Montgomery Road () Prepared for: ODLE

More information

New Seward and 36 th Avenue Intersection Conceptual Design

New Seward and 36 th Avenue Intersection Conceptual Design University of Alaska Anchorage New Seward and 36 th Avenue Intersection Conceptual Design Prepared By: Zaid S. Hussein Dana Menendez Galen Jones Civil Engineering Department Prof. Osama Abaza CE A404 Highway

More information

Transportation Master Plan Advisory Task Force

Transportation Master Plan Advisory Task Force Transportation Master Plan Advisory Task Force Network Alternatives & Phasing Strategy February 2016 BACKGROUND Table of Contents BACKGROUND Purpose & Introduction 2 Linking the TMP to Key Council Approved

More information

Citizen Advisory Committee Meeting. November 15, 2011 MPRB Headquarters- 6:30-8:30 p.m.

Citizen Advisory Committee Meeting. November 15, 2011 MPRB Headquarters- 6:30-8:30 p.m. Citizen Advisory Committee Meeting November 15, 2011 MPRB Headquarters- 6:30-8:30 p.m. Charge for Wirth Lake Area Citizen Advisory Committee: Prepare recommendations for the Board of Commissioners on the

More information

TRANSPORTATION NEEDS ASSESSMENT

TRANSPORTATION NEEDS ASSESSMENT TRANSPORTATION NEEDS ASSESSMENT A travel demand analysis was carried out to determine the operational issues and the potential benefit that adding traffic capacity would have on the road network. All the

More information

CASTLE CREEK CORRIDOR PLANNING PUBLIC OPEN HOUSE

CASTLE CREEK CORRIDOR PLANNING PUBLIC OPEN HOUSE CASTLE CREEK CORRIDOR PLANNING PUBLIC OPEN HOUSE Wednesday, November 15, 2017 AGENDA Project Background and Today s Goals Corridor Constraints and Conflicts Usage Information Public Process Schedule Review

More information

Living Streets Policy

Living Streets Policy Living Streets Policy Introduction Living streets balance the needs of motorists, bicyclists, pedestrians and transit riders in ways that promote safety and convenience, enhance community identity, create

More information

3.0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSEQUENCES 3.3 TRANSPORTATION

3.0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSEQUENCES 3.3 TRANSPORTATION 3.0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSEQUENCES 3.3 TRANSPORTATION INTRODUCTION This section analyzes the potential use of the proposed Ski Back Trail in the context of the physical design and both the existing and future

More information

LUTSEN RESORT ON LAKE SUPERIOR

LUTSEN RESORT ON LAKE SUPERIOR FOR SALE HOSPITALITY LUTSEN RESORT ON LAKE SUPERIOR 5700 W Highway 61 Lutsen, MN 55612 PRESENTED BY: Frank Jermusek, JD President / Managing Director 952.820.1615 frank.jermusek@svn.com Cameron Peterson

More information

Tonight is for you. Learn everything you can. Share all your ideas.

Tonight is for you. Learn everything you can. Share all your ideas. Strathcona Neighbourhood Renewal Draft Concept Design Tonight is for you. Learn everything you can. Share all your ideas. What is Neighbourhood Renewal? Creating a design with you for your neighbourhood.

More information

WELCOME. Purpose of the Open House. Update you on the project. Present a draft recommended plan. Receive your input

WELCOME. Purpose of the Open House. Update you on the project. Present a draft recommended plan. Receive your input WELCOME Purpose of the Open House The Town of Smiths Falls has initiated the Beckwith Street Redevelopment Plan that includes the preparation of a streetscape functional design for the renewal of Beckwith

More information

Chapter 5 FUNCTIONAL CLASSIFICATION

Chapter 5 FUNCTIONAL CLASSIFICATION Chapter 5 FUNCTIONAL CLASSIFICATION Functional classification is a system by which streets and roadways may be distinguished by types according to their function within the entire transportation network.

More information

City of Elizabeth City Neighborhood Traffic Calming Policy and Guidelines

City of Elizabeth City Neighborhood Traffic Calming Policy and Guidelines City of Elizabeth City Neighborhood Traffic Calming Policy and Guidelines I. Purpose: The City of Elizabeth City is committed to ensure the overall safety and livability of residential neighborhoods. One

More information

CONNECTING PEOPLE TO PLACES

CONNECTING PEOPLE TO PLACES CONNECTING PEOPLE TO PLACES 82 EAST BENCH MASTER PLAN 07 Introduction The East Bench transportation system is a collection of slow moving, treelined residential streets and major arteries that are the

More information

21.07 TRANSPORT CONNECTIVITY AND INFRASTRUCTURE

21.07 TRANSPORT CONNECTIVITY AND INFRASTRUCTURE 21.07 TRANSPORT CONNECTIVITY AND INFRASTRUCTURE 21.07-1 Connectivity and Choice Transport connectivity and mode choice are critical to achieving productive, sustainable and socially just cities. Travel

More information

o n - m o t o r i z e d transportation is an overlooked element that can greatly enhance the overall quality of life for the community s residents.

o n - m o t o r i z e d transportation is an overlooked element that can greatly enhance the overall quality of life for the community s residents. N o n - m o t o r i z e d transportation is an overlooked element that can greatly enhance the overall quality of life for the community s residents. 84 Transportation CHAPTER 11 INTRODUCTION Transportation

More information